"^K^t^^^ 


jm 


■mm.'^'^ 


"^Sl^l^^^ 


.%m 


mm << 


'«ii|r^C<'( 


(<(< 


<m<^ ( 


rrnm 


i^. 


(tC C 'c 


9bik^^ 


(M: 


(C e ( 


Wt^lK^' ^ ' 


:vf 


rr <i. vc 


K 










s( 


i-5lF 


KCmii 


^^r*«^^^C:-^C^ 












^iK^< 



HAND-BOOK 



ACTIVE SERVICE; 



CONTAINING 



Imtml %MtxuttmB iw Campip ^\dm. 



E^OR THE USE oar VOXiXTNTEERS. 



BY 

EGBERT L. ViELE, 

LATE U.S. A., 
CAPTAIN ENGINEERS, SEVENTH EEQIMENT, N. G. 



NEW YOPwK: 
D. VAN NOSTRAND, 192 BROADWAY. 

1861. 






EwTEEED, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1861, bj 
J). YAN NOSTEAND, 

^D the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southcra 
District of New York. 



JOHN F. TROW, 

PUmTEB, STKREOTYPER, AND ELECTROTYPEK, 

46, 48 & 50 Greene Street, 
New York. 



TO 



%\t Btk'xth legiment, fCatiaiml §m^t 



O I^ N E W YORK, 



WHicn, 



BY ASSIDUITY, DISCIPLINE, AND ESPRIT DTI C0EP3, 

NO LESS THAN BY ITS EMINENT PATEIOTISM, 

HAS BECOME 

THE MODEL EEGIMENT OF CITIZEN SOLDIERS, 

THIS BOOK 

IS RESPECTFULLY INSCPJBED, 



New York, 2l5^ February^ 1861. 

Captain E. L. Viele, 

Engineer y etc. 

Sir : — I have read with great satisfaction, the advance sheets of 
the ** Hand Book for Active Service " sent me. A practical work 
of this description is greatly needed, and will be prized by the sol- 
diers composing our miUtia throughout the States. Teaching the 
soldier how to prepare his food in the most economical and expe- 
ditious manner is certainly not the least important part of your in- 
teresting volume. Knowledge thus disseminated will, in case of 
service in the field, save many Uves, and add to the efficiency of the 
force, while the general information upon military subjects, given 
in a concise and familiar style, I doubt not will be highly appre- 
ciated. 

I am, ray dear Sir, 

Your friend and servant, 

MARSHALL LEFFERTS, 

CqI 1th Regiment, N. G. 



PEEF ACE. 



Theee are at tins moment in tlie United States 
3,000,000 of organized troops, all of them more or 
less accnstomed to the use of arms, and many of 
them have been drilled in military tactics. Yery 
few have been in actual service, and are therefore 
unaccustomed to the fatigues, and unacquainted 
with the duties, of camp and garrison life. Were 
any number of them to be brought suddenly into 
the field, this want of experience would be at once 
felt by officers as well as soldiers, and a great deal 
of useless labor, unnecessary privation, and per- 
sonal suffering would be gone through with before 
they would become sufficiently accustomed to the 
entire change in their mode of life. With a view 
to avoid these difficulties as much as possible, and 
set before the soldier in a familiar manner that line 
of conduct to be pursued in a campaign which would 
enable him to husband his physical resources and 



8 PREFACE. 

at the same time render him most effective in every 
way for any duty, these pages have been prepared ; 
the author claiming no originality or merit beyond 
a desire to aid his fellow-citizens in acquiring more 
thorough information on the subject of military 
duties. 

The large amount of intelligence and active 
energy which the volunteer brings with him into 
the field is frequently thrown away and wasted for 
the want of knowledge in daily routine, which, to- 
gether with a strict obedience to order, makes the 
chief value of the regular soldier. "When this 
knowledge is once acquired, volunteers have in 
many respects the advantage over regular troops. 

IiTew Yoek, March^ 1861. 



CONTENTS, 



CHAP. PAGE 

I. Introduction, . . . . . .11 

II. The Kecrfit, . , ... 15 

III. The Company,. . , . . . 28 

IV. The Regiment, ..... 37 
V. The March, ...... 48 

VI. The Camp, . . . . . 57 

VII. Guards and Guard Mounting, . . .64 

VIII. Rations, and Mode of Cooking Them, . . 11 

IX. Field Fortifications, . . . .92 

X. Artillery, ..... 149 

XL Manual for Light Artillery, . . . 157 

XII. Manual for Heavy Artillery, . . . 178 

XIII. AyMUNiTiON, ...... 250 



LIST OF ILLUSTKATIONS. 



TO FACK PAGB 

Formation of a Regiment and Company, . . 37 

Plan of Encampment, for a Regiment of Infantry, . 58 

The Portable Field Cooking Stove, ... 90 

Profile and Outline of a Bastion Front Field Work, . 93 

Redan, Cremaillere, Line and Star Forts, . . 102 

Mountain Howitzer and Limber, . . . .157 

24-PoUNDER ON A SlEGE CARRIAGE, . . . 182 

Siege Mortar and Mortar-Bed, . . . .216 

24-PoUNDER ON A BaRBETTE CARRIAGE, . • . 222 

8-Inch Columbiad on a Casemate Carriage, . . 244 



HAND-BOOK FOR ACTIVE SERVICE. 



CHAPTER I. 

INTRODUCTION. 

An effective organization of troops for all purposes, is 
composed of three arms : Infantry, Cavalry, and Artil- 
lery. Upon a due proportion of each of these arms de- 
pends their capacity for attack or defence. 

Infantry. — Experience has taught us that the most 
reliable arm under all circumstances is infantry ; it is 
more capable of endurance, and of being manoeuvred on 
every ground, even where the other arms would be ut- 
terly useless. 

The proportion of this arm in a complete organiza- 
tion would be four-fifths of the entire force. 

Infantry is subdivided into " Infantry of the Line," 
" Light Infantry," and Riflemen. The duties of each are 
distinct. In an engagement the Infantry of the Line bears 
the brunt of the battle ; moving in mass when acting on 
the offensive, it delivers its fire in line, and overwhelms 
the enemy by its force and energy, driving him from his 
position at the point of the bayonet ; and on the defensive 
it forms in square to repel the charge of cavalry, and 



12 INTRODUCTION. 

upon the coolness and determination with which it re- 
ceives the shock of attack, depends its success ; to waver 
is half a defeat. 

The duties of light infantry are to act as flankers on 
the march, to open an engagement, to draw the enemy's 
fire, to unmask his batteries, and generally to develop his 
strength and expose the weak points of his position, to 
feign attacks, and in every way to annoy, worry, and dis- 
comfit him. They are selected for picket and outpost 
duty, advance and rearguard. The French Zouave is the 
best model of a light infantry soldier. 

The efficiency of riflemen depends upon the locality 
at which they are posted ; if so placed that they can de- 
liver their fire with deliberation and precision, they be- 
come most valuable auxiliaries, and are often able to hold 
their position against a vastly superior force. They 
should be selected from those who are known as good 
shots, otherwise their principal value would be lost. 

Cavalry. — Cavalry is placed second in importance 
to infantry, although modern warfare has developed such 
perfection in artillery, that it has in many instances turned 
the tide of battle, and saved the other arms from a crush- 
ing defeat. Well-drilled cavalry, however, saves the 
strength of an army, which, in the absence of it, would be 
broken down by the advanced post duties, patrol and de- 
tachment service, and many other duties which, at the 
best, infantry v/ould but be able imperfectly to perform. 
Its chief value is felt when the infantry is exhausted by 
fatigue ; coming freshly upon the ground in an engage- 
ment, it gives the other troops time to recover their 
strength, and the commands to reform. The nature of 
country in which a campaign is undertaken, determines 
the relative proportion of cavalry to infantry. In an open 
coimtry, the cavalry can be increased with advantage. As 



INTRODL'CTION. 13 

a general rule, however, one regiment of cavalry to four 
regiments of foot is a proper proportion, since cavalry, 
unless well supported by infantry, would at times be 
utterly powerless and unable to protect itself. To render 
it perfect, it should be composed of strong, skilful, bold 
and reckless riders, well-trained and well-built horses, 
so that, dashing forward on an instant, and moving with 
celerity upon the enemy, it rides him down before he has 
time to prepare to meet the shock. 

Artillery. — Artillery is an arm of great power, and 
in skilful hands the most effective arm of the service ; it 
inspires confidence in the troops, and if the fire is de- 
livered with precision and rapidity, it is next to impossible 
to withstand it. On the other hand, if not well supported 
by infantry, it falls readily into the enemy's hands, giving 
him an immense advantage in an instant. To this end, 
care should be taken not to have it out of proportion to 
the arms. Two batteries of six (6-pounders) field pieces 
to one division or four foot regiments, will generally be 
found a due proportion. When the character of the 
ground is favorable, the nature of the service may re- 
quire an increase of the artillery to three batteries. Upon 
this basis, then, an effective organization or army corps 
would be composed of about 5,000 men : 

2 regiments of infantry of the line .... 1000 each 

1 regiment of light infantry lOOO 

1 regiment of riflemen 1000 

1 regiment of cavalry lOOO 

2 batteries (six pieces) of artillery, or 4 batteries of 4 

pieces if mountain howitzers are used. 

This disposition of the several arms is predicated 
upon the supposition that the troops are well drilled and 
disciplined, since the whole value of the arrangement is 
dependent on this discipline. Hence the necessity, in tlie 



14 INTKODUCTION. 

case of volunteer forces brought suddenly into active ser- 
vice, of making up for their want of experience by a close 
attention to the leading points of military instruction. 
For this purpose, the following paragraphs have been so 
arranged that each soldier can follow step by step the 
necessary course of instruction, and the duties which will 
devolve upon him. 

An intelligent mind becomes restive under the routine 
of the daily drill, unless it can appreciate the object to be 
gained by such discipline. By setting before the volun- 
teer the whole theory of army organization, it is believed 
that he will the more readily comprehend the great value 
of discipline in sustaining that organization, and under 
such impulses will arrive more rapidly at proficiency in 
drill, and yield a more ready obedience to orders. The 
minor details which are most generally learned in the 
field, are after all the most important to the personal 
health, comfort, and eflSciency of the troops ; and the 
sooner the volunteer becomes acquainted with these de- 
tails, the sooner will he be fitted for the active and ardu- 
ous duties of a campaign. 



CHAPTER 11. 

THE RECRUIT. 

The patriotic desire of every good citizen to serve his 
country, is the natural result of our form of government. 
Yet it is absolutely impossible for every man to perform 
all the duties of a soldier, no matter what may be his nat- 
ural impulses ; and to fill the ranks by accepting the ser- 
vices of all that offer themselves, would jeopardize the 
best interests of the service, and in many cases would 
impede, if not frustrate, the very objects of a campaign. 
Hence, there devolves upon the officer who recruits or 
organizes a company of men for active service, a very 
large share of responsibility ; his duty to the individual 
who offers, no less than to the service he seeks to enter, 
compels him to exercise the wisest discretion in the selec- 
tion of his men. Even where a company of volunteers 
already organized in time of peace is called upon to take 
the field, each man should be submitted to a critical 
medical examination, and if there is any defect in his physi- 
cal organization which would render him unfit to with- 
stand the fatigues of an active campaign, or any evidence 
of a susceptibility to disease, he should be rejected without 
hesitation. 

" An able-bodied soldier " should be of good character, 
sound in body and mind, of good appearance, well formed, 



16 THE KECRUIT. 

and fit in every particular to perform the duties required 
of him ; he should be over 18 years of age and under -1:0, 
and the greatest care should be taken to inform him with 
regard to the nature of his duties, the term of service, 
pay, clothing, rations, and other allowances, before he is 
finally received into the service. This will prevent re- 
gret and dissatisfaction, and secure efficiency. 



As fast as the men are enrolled, they should be in- 
structed three times a day in the school of the soldier : 
much of a soldier's subsequent efficiency depends upon his 
first " setting up." 

For the purpose of instruction, the companies are di- 
vided into '^ squads " of 10, and are first drilled in the 
" Position of a Soldier." Formed in one rank, about one 
pace apart, the instructor places them in position as fol- 
lows : 

POSITION OF THE SOLDIER. 

Heels on the same line, and as close together as the 
conformation of the man may permit ; the feet forming 
with each other something less than a right angle, the 
toes equally turned out ; the knees straight, without stiff- 
ness ; the body erect on the hips, the upper part inclining 
a little forward ; the shoulders square and falling equally *, 
arms hanging naturally, elbows near the body, the palm 
of the hand turned a little to the front, the little finger 
behind the seam of the pantaloons, or the centre of the 
thigh ; the face well to the front, the chin a little drawn 
in without constraint, and the eyes striking the ground 
at the distance of fifteen paces. 



THE EECKtTIT. 



17 



Remarks on the Position of the Soldier, 
Heels on the sarae line; 

Because, if one were in rear of the other, the shoulder 
on that side would be thrown back, or the position of the 
soldier would be constrained. 

Heels more or less closed ; 

Because, men who are knock-kneed, or who have legs 
with large calves, cannot, without constraint, make their 
heels touch while standing. 
Toes equally turned out, and not forming- too larg-e an angle ; 

Because, if one toe were turned out more than the 
other, a shoulder would be deranged, and if both toes be 
too much turned out, it would not be practicable to in- 
cline the upper part of the body forward without rendermg 
the whole position unsteady. 

Knees extended without stiffness; 

i3ecause, if stiffened, constraint and fatigue would be 
unavoidable. 

The body erect on the hips ; 

Because, it gives equilibrium to the position. The 
instructor will observe that many recruits have the bad 
habit of dropping a shoulder, of drawing in a side, or of 
advancing a hip, particularly the left, when under arms. 
These are defects which he will labor to correct. 

The upper part of the body inclining" forward ; 

Because, commonly recruits are disposed to do the 
reverse, to project the belly, and to throw back the shoul- 
ders when they wish to hold themselves erect — great in- 
conveniences in marching, as will be explained in the 
remarks on the principles of the step. The habit of in- 
clining forward the upper part of the body is so impor- 
tant to contract, that the instructor must enforce it at the 



18 THE RECRUIT. 

beginning, particularly with recruits who have naturally 
the opposite habit ; 

Shoulders sctuare; 
Because, if the shoulders be advanced beyond the line 
of the breast, and the back arched, (the defect called 
round-shouldered^ not uncommon among recruits,) the 
man cannot align himself nor use his musket with address. 
It is important, then, to correct this defect, and necessary 
to that end that the coat should set easy about the shoul- 
ders and arm-pits ; but, in correcting this defect, the in- 
structor will take care that the shoulders be not thrown 
too much to, the rear, which would cause the belly to pro- 
ject, and the small of the back to be curved. 

The arms hangring- naturally, elbows near the body, the palm 
of the hand a little turned to the front, the little fing-er 
behind the seam of the pantaloons ; 

Because, these positions are equally important to the 
shoulder-arms J and to prevent the man from occupying 
more space in a rank than is necessary to a free use of 
the musket ; they have, moreover, the advantage of keep- 
ing in the shoulders. 

The face well to the front, the chin a little drawn in, without 
constraint ; 

Because, if there be stiffness in the latter position, it 

would communicate itself to the whole of the upper part 

of the body, embarrass its movements, and give pain and 

fatigue. 

Eyes cast direct to the front ; 

Because, this is the surest means of maintaining the 
shoulders in line — an essential object, to be insisted on 
and attained. 

Too much attention cannot be paid to this first lesson 
in tactics, and the drill officer should be constantly on the 
watch throughout the whole progress of instruction, in the 



THE KECRUIT. 19 

use of arms, company and battalion drills, that every man 
should always maintain " the position of the soldier." 

j^M EXERCISE. 

In order to accustom the recruit more readily to the 
position of a soldier, and at the same time to render him 
more supple for acquiring a proficiency in the manual of 
arms — the following exercises should precede the regular 
drill. Formed in one rank at one pace apart, the in- 
structor will give the command : 

Arms — Upward. 
One time and two motions. 

First motion. — Bring the forearms to a vertical posi- 
tion, the fingers closed, and hands against the right and 
left breasts. 

Second motion, — Extend the arms vertically over the 
head, open the faigers and place the palms together. 

Arms — Downward. 

One time and two motions. 

First motion, — Bring the arms to the first position of 
arms upward. 

Second motion, — Drop the hands with force to the side. 

Arms — Forward. 

One time and motion. 

Extend the arms horizontally in front of the body, the 
palms of the hands touching. 

Arms — Downward. 
One time and two motions^ as 'before. 



20 THE KECKUIT. 

Arms — Backward. 

One time and one motion. 

Carry the hands behind the body, the palms touching. 

» 

Arms — Front. 
Carry the hands quickly to the side. 

Arms — Sideways. 

One time and one motion. 

Extend the arms horizontally to the right and left. 

Arms — Downward. 

As before. 

The instructor will now command in rapid succession, 
Arms sideways ! forward ! upward ! downward ! back- 
ward ! front ! all of which will be executed as directed. 
By continuing this exercise for 10 or 15 minutes at the 
commencement of every drill without arms, a remarkable 
improvement will soon be observed in the carriage of the 
men. 

SALUTING. 

Saluting with the right or left hand is executed in orje 
time and four motions. The instructor commands : 

Right hand — Salute. 

First motion, — Extend the arm horizontally to the 
right, palm down. 

Second motio7i. — Carry the hand to the visor of the 
cap. 

Third m^oiion. — Carry the arm back to the horizontal 
position. 

Fourth motion. — Drop the hand quickly to the side. 



THE RECKUIT. 21 

Left hand — Salute. 

The same as for the right. 

The salute should always be made with the hand op- 
posite to the person saluted. 

Having thoroughly impressed upon the men the above 
rules, the instructor commands : 

1. Eyes — Right. 2. Front. 

At the word rights the soldier will turn his head gen- 
tly, so as to bring the inner corner of the left eye in a line 
with the buttons of the coat, the eyes fixed on the line of 
the eyes of the men in the same rank. At the command 
front ^ the head will resume the direct or habitual position. 
The instructor will take care that the movement of the 
head does not derange the squareness of the shoulders, 
and that the men do not acquire a habit of throwing down 
the head in dressing. 

The movement of Eyes — Left^ will le executed ly inverse means, 

FACINGS. 

Facmg to the right and left vv^ill be executed in one 
time^ or pause. The instructor commands : 

1. Squad, 2. Bight (or lefi)—FAC^, 

At the word face^ raise the right foot slightly, turn on 
the left heel, to the right, (or left,) raising the left toe a 
little, and then replace the right heel beside the left, and 
on the same line. The face should always be through a 
right angle, and should be executed by the feet and legs, 
the body moving around to the right (or left) without 
twisting or constraint. The instructor should labor to keep 
the body steady, and to prevent the formation of the habit 
of bending the knees, or springijig. 



22 



THE EECKLIT. 



The full face to the rear is alwa^^s to the right, and is 
executed in two times, or pauses. The instructor com- 
mands : 

1. Squad, 2. About — Face. 

First Motion. — At the word about, the soldier will 
turn far enough on the left heel to bring the left toe di- 
rectly to the front, at the same time carrying his right 
foot to the rear, the hollow opposite to, and full three 
inches from the left heel, the feet square to each other. 
The back of the right hand is placed a little above the 
right hi J), and the body is turned to the right sufficiently 
to give ease to the position. 

Second Motion, — At the v/ord face, the soldier raises 
his toes a little, turns upon both heels, faces to the rear, 
keeping his legs straight, and draws back the right heel 
by the side of the left, at the same time dropping his 
right hand by his side. 

BALANCE STEP. 

Before commencing the march the soldier should al- 
ways be instructed in the balance step, the object of which 
is to teach him the free movements of his limbs, while he 
at the same time preserves perfect squareness of the shoul- 
ders, with the greatest steadiness of the body ; no labor 
should be spared to attain this object, which lies at the 
very foundation of good marching. 

The squad being at attention, the instructor com- 
mands : 

Left foot — Forward. 

At this command the soldier will throw his left foot 
gently forwards, about twenty-four inches, balancing his 
body well on the right foot without changing the position 
of the shoulders, and without the body losing its erect 



THE RECRUIT. 23 

position. The toe should be turned out as in the position 
of the soldier, the foot about three inches from the ground 
and very nearly parallel to it, the toe being very slightly 
depressed. 

At the command : 

Left foot — Rear. 

The left foot is brought gently back, the ball of the 
left foot close to the right heel, the leg straight, toe raised, 
and heel depressed. 

As soon as the soldier becomes steady in the new po- 
sition, the instructor repeats the command, left foot for- 
ivard^ then left foot rear^ for several times, and then 
commands : 

Halt ; 

at which the left foot, either advanced or to the rear, is 
brought to the right, as in the position of the soldier. 

The instructor then causes the soldier to balance on the 
left foot, by advancing and retiring the right, as has been 
directed for the left, 

THE DIRECT STEP. 

After the soldier is sufficiently instructed in the bal- 
ance step to execute it on either foot without losing his 
balance, the instructor will proceed to instruct him in the 
mechanicsm of the direct step. For this purpose he will 
command : 

1. By the numbers — Forward, 2. One. 

At the command, one, the soldier will throw forward 
the left foot as in the position of left foot forward, the in- 
structor then commands : 

Two. 

At this command, the weight of the body is thrown 



24 THE KECBUIT. 

forward, the left foot striking the ground without shock, 
at the distance of twenty-eight inches from the right ; the 
body assumes the perpendicular position, and the right 
foot is brought up to the position of right foot rear. 

The right foot is then brought forward at the com- 
mand one, and the step completed at the command two ; 
thus the squad is made to advance step by step. The 
halt is executed as in the balance step. 

When the squad is sufficiently instructed in the me- 
chanism of the direct step, the instructor will cause it to 
take up the march in common tinie ; for this purpose he 
will command : 

1. Squad forward — Common time, 2. March. 

At the command forward, the soldier will throw the 
weight of his body on the right leg, without bending the 
left knee. 

At the command march, he will smartly, but without 
a jerk, carry straight forward the left foot twenty-eight 
inches from the right, the sole near the ground, the leg 
extended, the toe a little depressed, and both it and the 
knee slightly turned out ; he will at the same time throw 
the weight of the body forward, and plant flat the left 
foot, without shock, precisely at the distance where it 
finds itself from the right when the weight of the body is 
brought forward, the whole of which will now rest on the 
left foot. The soldier will next, in like manner, advance 
the right foot and plant it as directed for the left, the heel 
twenty-eight inches from the heel of the left foot, and thus 
continue the march without crossing the legs, or striking 
one against the other, w^ithout turning the shoulders, and 
always preserving the face direct to the front. Common 
time is executed at the rate of ninety steps to the 
minute. 



THE RECE.UIT. 25 

When the instructor wishes to arrest the march, he 

commands : 

1. Squad, 2, Halt. 

The command halt, should be given just as one foot 
has come to the ground, and the other is raised for making 
the next step ; the soldier instinctively completes the 
pace with the raised foot, and brings the other firmly to 
its place beside it. By careful attention ^to this rule a 
large command may as readily be halted at the same in- 
stant, as a single individual. 

The principles of the step in quick time are the same 
as for common time ; it is executed, however, at the rate 
of 110 steps per minute. After the soldier is well estab- 
lished in the length and swiftness of the step at common 
time, he should be practised in quick time, as it is the 
pace best adapted to marches, the manoeuvres, etc. 

The instructor wishing the squad to march in quick 
time, commands : 

1. Squad forward. 2. March. 

PRINCIPLES OF THE DOUBLE QUICK STEP. 

The length of the double quick step is thirty-three 
inches, and its swiftness is at the rate of 165 steps per 
minute. This step is designed especially for light troops, 
such as light infantry and riflemen, and to them it is in- 
dispensable ; its utility has, however, been so frequently 
demonstrated of late years, as to make it proper that it 
should form a part of the instruction of all infantry 
troops. 

The instructor wishing to teach his squad the prin- 
ciples and mechanism of the double quick step, com- 
mands : 

1. Double quick step, 2. March. 



26 THE EECEUIT. 

At the command double quick step, the soldier will 
raise his hands to a level with his hips, the hands closed, 
the nails towards the body, the elbows to the rear, and 
well drawn in towards the body. 

At the command march^ he will raise his left knee as 
high as possible without derangement of the body, keep- 
ing his leg from the knee down in a vertical position, the 
toe depressed ; he will then replace his foot in its former 
position. At the command two, he will execute with the 
right leg what has just been prescribed for the left, and 
the alternate movement of the legs at the command one^ 
two, will be continued until the command : 

1. Squad, 2. Halt. 

At the command halt, the soldier will bring the foot 
which is raised by the side of the other, and at the same 
time dropping his hands by his side will resume the posi- 
tion of the soldier without arms. 

When the squad has learned to execute the step prop- 
erly, the instructor will repeat the words one^ two, in 
more rapid succession, and will finally drop them, leaving 
the fdes to execute the step in their own time. The in- 
structor will see that the step is taken in rapid succession, 
and that none of the files lose the step. 

The soldier being sufficiently established in the prin- 
ciples of this step, the instructor will command : 

1. Squad forward, 2. Double qukJc. 3. March. 

At the command forward^ the soldier will throw the 
weight of his body on the right leg, without bending the 
left knee. 

At the command double quicJc, he will place his arms 
as indicated above. 

At the command march, he will carry forward the left 



THE KECRUIT. 27 

foot, and plant it, the toe first, at the distance of thirty- 
three inches from the right, the leg slightly bent, and the 
knee somewhat raised ; he will then execute with the 
right foot what has just been prescribed for the left. This 
alternate movement of the legs will take place by throwing 
the weight of the body on the foot that is planted, and by 
allowing a natural, oscillatory motion to the arms. The 
feet should not be raised too much, a common fault with 
beginners, and the body should incline slightly forward. 

The double quick step may be executed w^ith different 
degrees of swiftness. Under urgent circumstances, the 
cadence of this step may be increased to 180 per minute. 
At this rate a distance of 4,000, yards would be passed 
over in about twenty-five minutes. 

The men should also be exercised in running ; the 
principles are the same as for the double quick step, the 
only difference consisting in a greater degree of swiftness. 

It is recommended in marching in double quick time, 
or the run, that the men should breathe as much as pos- 
sible through the nose, keeping the mouth closed. 

Note. — The Manual of Arms is the next step of instruction in 
the school of the soldier ; for this Tactics will be referred to, as the 
brevity of this work will not admit of its insertion. 



CHAPTER III. 

THE COMPANY. 

In an organization, the smallest number complete in 
itself, is the company^ which varies in number from 50 to 
100 rank and file. 

Note. — The general principles of organization are the same for 
all arms. The variation in the Cavalry will be referred to, and that 
for Artillery will be found in the Manual for Light and Heavy Guns. 

A captain, two or more lieutenants, from four to six 
sergeants, and as many corporals, are attached to every 
company. The captain and lieutenants are the officers, 
and the sergeants and corporals the non-commissioned 
officers of the company. 

The captain is responsible for the instruction, disci- 
pline, general efficiency, and moral tone of the company. 

The lieutenants assist the captain in the maintenance 
of discipline, and in the instruction. 

The company is divided into two equal parts, which 
are designated as the first and second platoon, counting 
from the right ; and each platoon is, in like manner, di- 
vided into two sections. 

The company is formed into two ranks in the follow- 
ing manner : the corporals on the right and left of pla- 
toons, according to height ; the tallest corporal and the 



THE COMPANY. 29 

tallest man from the first file on the right, the next two 
tallest men from the second file, and so on to the last file, 
which is composed of the shortest corporal and the short- 
est man. 

The odd and even files, numbered as one, two, in the 
company, from right to left, form groups of four men, 
who, when they act as light troops, are designated com- 
rades in battle. 

The officers and non-commissioned officers of the com- 
pany are posted in the following manner : 

The captain, on the right of the company, touching 
with the left elbow. 

The first sergeant, in the rear rank, touching with the 
left elbow, and covering the captain. In the manoeuvres 
he is denominated covering sergeant, or right g\iide of the 
company. 

The remaining officers and sergeants are posted as file- 
closers, in the rank of file closers, two paces behind the 
rear rank. 

T\iQ first lieutenant, opposite the centre of the fourth 
section. 

The second lieutenant, opposite the centre of the first 
platoon. 

The third lieutenant, opposite the centre of the second 
platoon. 

The second sergeant, opposite the second file from the 
left of the company. In the manoeuvres he is called the 
left guide of the company. 

The third sergeant, opposite the second file from the 
right of the second platoon. 

The fourth sergeant, opposite the second file from the 
left of the first platoon. 

The fifth sergeant, opposite the second file from the 
right of the first platoon. 



30 THE COMPAJSTY. 

The corporals are posted in the front rank. 

The company in cavalry is denominated the troop ; it is 
organized upon the same principles as that of infantry ; 
its habitual formation is in two ranks. 

When the company is in line, and acting singly, the 
officers and non-commissioned officers are posted as fol- 
lows : 

The cajJtain in front of the centre, one pace from the 
front rank. 

The first lieutenant in rear of the centre, in the rank 
of file-closers. 

The second lieutenant commands the first platoon ; in 
the absence of a third lieutenant , the second platoon is 
commanded hj ih^ senior sergeant. The chiefs of platoons 
are posted one pace in front of the centres of their re- 
spective platoons. 

The first sergeant in rear of the right, in the rank of 
file-closers. 

The second and third sergeants on the right and left 
of the company, and denominated the guide of the right^ 
and guide of the hft^ respectively. 

The fourth sergeant is on the left of the first platoon, 
in the front rank, and counted in the rank ; the fifth ser- 
geant is in a corresponding position on the right of the 
second platoon. 

Corporals on the flanks of platoons. 

Buglers twenty paces in rear of the centre. 

Two companies of cavalry united constitute a squad- 
ron. Each squadron is composed of four platoons, distin- 
guished by the denomination of first, second, third, and 
fourth, commencing on the right. 

The first and second platoons form the first division, 
the third and fourth form the second division. 

The senior captain of the squadron is denominated th<^ 



THE COMPANY. * 31 

captain commanding, the junior captain the second cap- . 
tain. 

When the squadron is in line, the officers and non- 
commissioned officers are posted as follows : 

The captain commanding at the centre of the squadron, 
the croup of his horse one pace in front of the heads of 
the horses of the front rank. 

The second captain three paces in rear of the centre of 
the squadron. He is charged with the alignment of the 
rear rank and line of file-closers. 

The senior first lieutenant commands the first platoon ; 
ihe junior first lieutenant commands the fourth platoon. 

The senior second lieutenant commands the second 
platoon ; \h.e junior second lieutenant commands the third 
platoon. 

Each of these officers is posted at the centre of his 
platoon, with the croup of his horse one pace in front of 
the heads of the horses of the front rank. 

The senior sergeant is posted behind the first file from 
the right of the first platoon ; he is the principal guide 
when the column of squadrons is left in front. 

The second sergeant is behind the third file from the 
left of the fourth platoon ; he is principal guide when the 
column of squadrons is right in front. 

The third sergeant is posted on the right of the front 
rank of the squadron ; he is the guide of the right, and is 
not counted in the rank. 

The fourth sergeant on the left of the front rank ; he 
is guide of the left, and not counted in the rank. 

The fifth sergeant on the left of the first platoon, and 
counted in the rank. 

The sixth sergeant on the right of the second platoon, 
also counted in the rank. 

The seventh sergeant on the right of the third platoon ; 



32 • THE COMPANY. 

the eighth sergeant on the right of the fourth platoon — 
both are counted in the rank. 

The heads of the horses of the file-closers are at one 
pace from the croup of those of the rear rank. 

The corporals are in the front rank, on the right and 
left of their respective platoons, and supply the places of 
sergeants when necessary. 

When guidons are used, they are carried by the non- 
commissioned officers on the left of the first and third 
platoons. 

As the company is the unit of a military organization, 
the efficiency of that organization depends upon the effi- 
ciency of the unit ; and the captain or commanding officer 
of a company should always bear in mind that there is no 
position in the service, second in importance to his. He 
should be thoroughly familiar with tactics. He should 
strive to acquaint himself with the individual character 
and habits of his men, so as to know how much he can 
depend upon them 5 and to be able to make from them a 
selection of any number at any time for important ser- 
vice. While he is personally responsible for the proper 
care and preservation of the arms and accoutrements, he 
should also feel himself responsible for the proper cloth- 
ing and diet of his men. In order the more effectively to 
carry out a rigid supervision of the personal conduct and 
comfort of the men, he will cause them to be numbered in a 
regular series, including the non-commissioned officers, and 
divided into several squads, each to be put under the 
charge of a non-commissioned officer. As far as practicable, 
the men of each squad should be quartered together. 

Each of the lieutenants is charged with a squad for the 
supervision of its order and cleanliness ; and captains 
should require their subalterns to assist them in the per- 
formance of all company duties. 



•THE COMPANY. 33 

The utmost attention should be paid by captains to 
the cleanliness of their men, as to their persons, clothing, 
arms, accoutrements, and equipments, and also as to their 
quarters or tents. 

The name of each soldier should be labelled on his 
bunk in quarters, and his company number should be 
placed against his arms and accoutrements. 

The arms are placed in arm-racks, the stoppers in the 
muzzles, the cocks let down, and the bayonets in their 
scabbards, the accoutrements suspended over the arms, 
and the swords or sabres, when these are worn, hung up 
by the belts on pegs. 

The knapsack of each man should be placed at the 
foot of his bunk when he is in quarters, packed with his 
effects, and ready to be slung ; the overcoat rolled, strap- 
ped, and placed under the knapsack ; the cap on a shelf, 
and his boots well cleaned. Dirty clothes should be kept 
in an appropriate part of the knapsack ; nothing to be 
put under the bedding. 

Cooking utensils and table furniture should be clean, 
and in their appropriate places ; blacking and brushes out 
of sight ; the fuel in boxes. 

The cleaning up should take place at least once a 
week. The chiefs of squads should cause bunks and bed- 
ding to be overhauled, floors cleaned, and arms, accoutre- 
ments, etc., all put in order. 

Non-commissioned officers in charge of squads, should 
be held immediately responsible that their men observe 
what is prescribed above ; that they wash their hands and 
faces daily ; that they brush or comb their heads and 
beards ; that those who go on duty put their arms, accou- 
trements, dress, etc., in the best order. 

Commanders of companies should see that the arms 
and accoutrements in possession of the men are always, 
2* 



34 THE COMPANY. • 

kept in good order, and that proper care is taken in clean- 
ing them. 

Arms should not be taken to pieces without permission 
of an officer. Bright barrels should be kept clean and free 
from rust, without polishing them ; care should be taken 
not to bruise or bend the barrel. After firing, wash out 
the bore, wipe it dry, and then pass a bit of cloth, slightly 
greased, to the bottom. In these operations, a rod of wood 
with a loop on one end is to be used instead of the ram- 
mer. The barrel, when not in use, should be closed with 
a stopper. For exercise each man should keep himself 
provided with a piece of sole leather to fit the cap or 
countersink of the hammer, to prevent breaking the nipple. 

All field pieces in the possession of artillery companies 
should be kept clean and dry ; their vents frequently 
examined, to see that they are clear ; the elevating screw 
wiped clean, worked, and oiled. When tarpaulins are 
placed over them, they should occasionally be removed, 
the guns and carriages brushed off, and, if damp, allowed 
to dry. 

The implements should all be kept clean and under 
cover, the harness and leather articles should be brushed 
and greased with neats foot oil as often as their condition 
requires it, and if they have a reddish hue, mix a little 
lampblack with the oil. First brush the leather, then 
pass over it a sponge wet with warm water, and apply 
the oil before the leather is quite dry. 

Arms should not be left loaded in armories, quarters, 
or tents, or when the men are off duty, except by special 
orders. The ammunition in the possession of the men 
should be inspected frequently, and any damaged, wasted, 
or lost by neglect, should be paid for. 

Knapsacks should be black ; they should be marked 
on the outside with the number of the regiment, and on 



THE COMPANY. 35 

the inside with the letter of the company, and the number 
of the soldier, on such part as will readily be seen at in- 
spections. 

Haversacks should be marked on the flap with the 
number and name of the regiment, the letter of the com- 
pany, and the number of the soldier. 

Both officers and men should wear the prescribed uni- 
form in camp or garrison. 

In camp or quarters, the officers should visit the kitch- 
en daily and inspect the kettles, food, etc., and at all times 
carefully attend to the messing and economy of their com- 
panies. 

The company rations are usually taken charge of by 
the orderly sergeant, and issued daily to the cooks, by 
whom they are prepared and served to the company. The 
men of the company serve in turn as cooks, two being the 
usual number serving at once. When in camp, the men 
present themselves at meal times to the cooks, who issue 
to each man in turn his proper allowance ; in garrison or 
quarters the tables are set out, and the cooks place each 
man's ration on his plate, and in his cup, before the com- 
pany is marched in. ^^ 

When not actually in the field the ration is in most cases 
more than sufficient, so that by care on the part of the 
orderly sergeant and cooks, there is more or less saved on 
the rations of the company ; this saving is sold for the 
benefit of the company, and constitutes what is denomi- 
nated company fund. 

When a militia company is enrolled for active service 
the captain should, at the earliest possible moment, have 
it properly uniformed and equipped, and taught how to 
take care of its ar«is, clothing, etc. ; each man should be 
provided with his knapsack, haversack, blanket, knife ancj 
fork, spoon^ tin plate, and cup. 



36 ' THE COMPANY. 

Canteens are also necessary in most cases they are 
worn over the haversack. 

Each man should also be provided with the following 
articles : 

Two woollen undershirts. ^ 

Two pair thick cotton drawers. 

Four pair woollen socks. 

Two pair stout shoes, with broad, thick soles, for 
footmen. 

One pair boots, and one pair shoes for horsemen. 

In starting out on a campaign, an amount of clothing 
equal at least to one-fourth the strength of the company, 
should be transported with the company's equipments. 
The uniform for active service should consist of a simple 
fatigue dress of durable material, a plain and substantial 
overcoat with a cape, and a forage cap. 



COMPANY BOOKS. 

Every company should be provided with 

1. A morning report book, showing the strength of 
the company every mornir^, the number for duty, the 
number sick, and all the casualties that may occur. 

2. A clothing book, showing the clothing issued to 
each man, the date of issue, and price. 

3. A roster, arranged in alphabetical order, from 
which the details for guard duty and other service are made, 
each man being credited with his tour, and the duty fairly 
distributed. 



CHAPTER IV. 

THE REGIMENT. 

A Regiment is composed of ten companies, which are 
habitually posted from right to left, in the following 
order \ first, sixth, fourth^ ninth, third, eighth, fifth, tenth, 
seventh, second, according to the rank of the captain. 
With a less number 6f companies the same principle will 
be observed, viz. : the first captain commands the right 
company, the second captain the left company, the third 
captain the right centre company, and so on. 

The companies thus posted are designated from right 
to left, first company, second company, etc. This designa- 
tion is observed in all the manoeuvres. 

The first two companies on the right, whatever their 
denomination, form \X\q first division ; the next two com- 
panies the second division ; and so on to the left. 

In all exercises and manoeuvres, every regiment, or 
part of a regiment, composed of two or more companies, 
is called a battalion. 

Every regiment is provided with a color, which is 
posted with its guard, to be designated hereafter, on the 
left of the right centre company ; that company, and all 
on its right, belongs to the right wing of the regiment, or 
battalion ; the remaining companies constitute the left 
wing. 



38 THE KEGIMENT. 

To each regiment are attached a colonel, who com- 
mands it, and is responsible for its general discipline and 
instruction; a lieutenant-colonel^ two majors, a quarter- 
master, commissary, paymaster, surgeon, and frequently 
an assistant surgeon, an adjutant, sergeant-major, quarter^ 
master-sergeant, and commissary sergeant. The four first 
named of these officers are the Jield officers of the regi- 
ment ; the others constitute its commissioned and non- 
commissioned staff. 



POSTS OF FIELD OFFICERS AND REGIMENTAL STAFF. 

The field officers are supposed to be mounted, and 
on active service must be on horseback ; the adjutant, 
when the battalion is manoeuvring, is on foot ; when on 
the march, or in action, he is mounted. 

The colonel's post is thirty paces in rear of the file- 
closers, and opposite the centre of the battalion. The 
lieutenant-colonel and senior major are behind the centres 
of the right and left wing respectively, the junior major 
behind the centre of the battalion, all twelve paces in 
rear of the file-closers. 

The adjutant and sergeant-major are opposite the 
right and left of the battalion respectively, and eight 
paces in rear of the file-closers. They assist the lieu- 
tenant-colonel and major, respectively, in the manoeuvres. 

The quartermaster, surgeon, and other staff officers, 
are in one rank on the left of the colonel, and three paces 
in his rear. The quartermaster-sergeant is on a line with 
the front rank of the field music, and two paces on its 
right, 

PIONEERS, FIELD MUSIC, AND BAND. 

The pioneers (one for each company) are drawn up 
in two ranks, and posted on the right, having their left 



THE REGIMENT. 39 

four paces from the right of the first company. A cor- 
poral of pioneers, selected from the corporals by the 
colonel, is posted on the right of the pioneers. 

The field music (two musicians to each company) is 
drawn up in four ranks, and posted twelve paces in rear 
of the file-closers, the left opposite the centre company. 

Tne principal musician is two paces in front of the 
field music. The regimental band, (not to exceed sixteen 
musicians,) if there be one, is drawn up in two or four 
ranks, according to its numbers, and posted five paces in 
rear of the field music, having a principal musician at its 
head. 

COLOR GUARD. 

The color guard of a regiment or battalion is com- 
posed of eight corporals, posted on the left of the right 
centre company, of which company, for the time being, 
the guard forms a part. 

The front rank is composed of a sergean^ selected by 
the colonel, who is called the color-hearer ^ with the two 
ranking corporals on his right and left ; the rear rank is 
composed of the three corporals next in rank ; the three 
remaining corporals are posted in rear in the rank of file- 
closers. The left guide of the color company, when the 
three last named corporals are in the rank of file-closers, 
is immediately on their left. 

In battalions of less than five companies, there should 
be no color guard, and no display of colors, except at re- 
views. 

GENERAL GUIDES AND MARKERS. 

There should be two general guides in each battalion, 
selected by the colonel from, among the sergeants (other 
than first sergeants) for their accuracy in marching. These, 
sergeants are denominated right and left general guide ^ 



40 THE REGIMENT. 

respectively, and are posted in the line of file-closers ; the 
first in rear of the right, and the second in rear of the left 
flank of the battalion. 

Three markers are required to every battalion ; they 
are posted behind the first company in the rank of file- 
closers, when the battalion is in line, and behind the^lead- 
ing company or division whenever it is in column. 



TO FORM THE REGIMENT OR BATTALION. 

At the signal, called the adjutants call^ the companies 
are marched from the company parades by their captains, 
the music playing. The color company serves as the basis 
of the formation, and is the first to form ; the color guard 
being at the point where the centre of the line is to rest, 
one marker is placed in front of it, his elbow touching the 
right corporal of the color guard, and another on the line 
at a little less than company distance from him, on his 
right, and facing towards him; the color company is. 
halted three paces behind this line, faced to the front, and 
dressed up upon the line by the captain, who aligns it to 
the left. 

The company on the left of the color is the next to 
take its post ; it is halted three paces behind the line, its 
right nearly behind the left file of the color guard, and 
faced to the front. As soon as it halts, the left guide of the 
company throws himself out, so as to be opposite one of 
the three left files of the company, faces to the right, and 
aligns himself upon the two markers ; the captain then 
places himself on the left of the color guard, on a line with 
its front rank, and aligns the company to the right. The 
company on the right of the colors forms next upon the 
same principles ; the right guide posts himself upon the 
line opposite one of the three right files of the company, 



THE REGIMENT. 41 

and faces to the left ; the captain places himself on the right 
of the color company, and aligns his company to the left. 
The remaining companies take their posts on the left 
and right in succession, and when the formation is com- 
plete, the adjutant commands. Guides post ; at this com- 
mand the guides on the line retire to their places by 
passing through the intervals between the companies, and 
those captains who are on the left of their companies 
shift to the right. 



DRESS PARADE. 

There shall be daily one dress parade, at troop or re- 
treat, as the commanding officer may direct. 

A signal will be beat or sounded half an hour before 
troop or retreat, for the music to assemble on the regi- 
mental parade, and each company to turn out under arms 
on its own parade, for roll-call and inspection by its officers. 

Ten minutes after that signal, the adjutani^s call will 
be given, when the captains will march their companies 
(the band playing) to the regimental parade, where they 
take their positions in line as directed. When the line is 
formed, the captain of the first company, on notice from 
the adjutant, steps one pace to the front, and gives to his 
company the command. Order arms ; parade ; rest ; which 
is repeated by each captain in succession to the left. The 
adjutant takes post two paces on the right of the line ; the 
sergeant-major two paces on the left. The music will 
be formed in two ranks on the right of the adjutant. The 
senior officer present will take the command of the parade, 
and will take post at a suitable distance in front, opposite 
the centre, facing the line. 

When the companies have ordered arms, the adjutant 
will order the music to beat off, when it will commence 



42 THE REGIMENT. 

on the right, beat in front of the line to the left, and back 
to its place on the right. 

When the music has ceased, the adjutant will step 
two paces to the front, face to the left, and command : 

1. Attention, 2. Battalion, 3. Shoulder — Arms. 4. 
Prepare to open ranks, 5. To the rear open order, 
6. March. 

At the sixth command, the ranks will be opened ac- 
cording to the system laid down in the Infantry Tactics, 
the commissioned officers marching to the front, the com- 
pany officers four paces, field officers six paces, opposite 
to their positions in the order of battle, where they will 
halt and dress. The adjutant, seeing the ranks aligned, 
will command > 

Front. 

and march along the front to the centre, face to the right, 
and pass the line of company officers eight or ten paces, 
when he will come to the right-about, and command : 

Present — Arms ; 

when arms will be presented, officers saluting. 

Seeing this executed, he wull face about to the com- 
manding offixer, salute, and report, " Sir, the parade is 
formed,^'' The adjutant will then, on intimation to that 
effect, take his station three paces on the left of the com- 
manding officer, one pace retired, passing round his rear. 

The commanding officer, having acknowledged the 
salute of the line by touching his hat, will, after the adju- 
tant has taken his post, draw his sword, and command : 

1. Battalion, 2. Shoulder — Arms; 

and add such exercises as he may think proper, concluding 
with : 

Order — Arms ; 



THE REGIMENT. 43 

then return his sword, and direct the adjutant to receive 
the reports. The adjutant will now pass round the right 
of the commanding officer, advance upon the line, halt 
midway between him and the line of company officers, 
and command : 

1. First Sergeants^ to the front and centre. 2. March. 

At the first command, they will shoulder arms as ser- 
geants, march two paces to the front, and face inward. 
At the second command, they will march to the centre, 
and halt. The adjutant will then order : 

1. Front — Face. 2. Report. 

At the last word, each in succession, beginning on the 
right, will salute by bringing the left hand smartly across 
the breast to the right shoulder, and report the result of 
the roll-call previously made on the company parade. 
The adjutant again commands : 

1. First Sergeants^ outward — Face. 2. To your posts — 
March ; 

when they will resume their places, and order arms. The 
adjutant will now face to the commanding officer, salute, 
report absent officers, and give the result of the first ser- 
geants' reports. The commanding officer will next direct 
the orders to be read, when the adjutant will face about, 
and announce : 

Attention to Orders. 

He will then read the orders. 

The orders having been read, the adjutant will face to 
the commanding officer, salute and report ; when, on an 
intimation from the commander, he will face again to the 
line, and announce : 

Parade is Dismissed, 



44 THE KEGIMENT. 

All the officers will now return their swords, face in- 
wards, and close on the adjutant, he having taken position 
in their line, the field officers on the flanks. The adjutant 
commands : 

1. Front — Face. 2. Forward — March; 

when they will march forward, dressing on the centre, 
the music playing, and when within six paces of the com- 
mander, the adjutant will give the word : 

Halt. 

The officers will then salute the commanding officer 
by raising the hand to the cap, and there remain until he 
shall have communicated to them such instructions as he 
may have to give, or intimates that the ceremony is fin- 
ished. As the officers disperse, the first sergeants will 
close the ranks of their respective companies, and march 
them to the company parades, where they will be dis- 
missed, the band continuing to play until the companies 
clear the regimental parade. • 

All field and company officers and men will be pres- 
ent at dress parades^ unless especially excused, or on 
some duty incompatible with such attendance. 

A dress parade once a day will not be dispensed with, 
except on extraordinary and urgent occasions. 



THE battalion IN COLUMN. 

Mov the march, in many of the manoeuvres, etc., the 
battalion is in column. The column may be one of com- 
panies or of divisions, in rare instances it is one of pla- 
toons. It may be a column right in front, in which case 
the first company, or division, is in front, all the others 
being behind it in regular succession; or it may be i 



THE REGIMENT. 45 

column left in front, in which the last company or di- 
vision leads, the others following in the inverse order of 
their numbers. 

When the right is in front, the guides of the column 
are habitually to the left^ and to the right when the col- 
umn is left in front. 

The column may be one at full distance, at half dis- 
tance, or closed in mass ; in the first case, the distance 
between the guides of any two consecutive companies or 
divisions ; in the second case, it is one-half the width of 
the company or division ; and in the last case, that of 
the column closed in mass, the distance between the 
guides is six paces. 



POSTS OF THE OFFICERS WHEN THE BATTALION IS IN COLUMN. 

The colonel is on the directing flank, fifteen or twenty 
paces from the guides, and abreast the centre of his bat- 
talion ; the lieutenant-colonel is on the directing flank, 
abreast with the leading company or division, and six 
paces from the guide ; the majors are on the same flank, 
the senior abreast with the rearmost company or division, 
and six paces from the guide, the junior in a correspond- 
ing position abi^ast the centre company ; the adjutant is 
near the lieutenant-colonel, and the sergeant-major near 
the senior major. 

In a column of companies, the captains are two paces 
in front of the centres of their companies ; the right guide 
of each company is on the right of the front rank, the left 
guide in a corresponding position on the left; the lieuten- 
ants, and remaining sergeants, are in the rank of file-closers. 

In a column of divisions, the senior captain of each 
division is two paces in front of the centre of his division, 
the junior captain in the interval between the two com- 



46 THE REGIMENT. 

panies ; the right guide of the right company is on the 
right of the front rank of the division, the left guide of 
the left company is in a corresponding position on the 
left ; the right guide of the left company is in the rear 
rank, behind the junior captain, and the left guide of the 
right company is in the rank of the file-closers. 

Two or more regiments serving together constitute a 
brigade, under the command of a brigadier-generaL 

Two or more brigades serving together constitute a 
division, commanded by a major-general. 

Two divisions serving together constitute an army 
corps. 

The army corps, when supplied with a due proportion 
of cavalry, artillery, etc., comprises within itself all the 
elements of a complete army, ready for any emergency. 

The interval between two contiguous regiments in the 
same brigade, division, or army corps, is twenty-two paces. 

As often as one or more brigades or divisions, united 
in the same line, manoeuvre together, each battalion will 
be designated by its number, according to its position in 
the line. The battalion on the right of the whole is de- 
nominated ^rs^, that next on its left second, the following 
one third, and so on to the battalion that closes the left of 
the line. 

In line of battle, the general (the senior major-general 
present) has no fixed position ; he goes whithersoever he 
may judge his presence necessary. 

In column, he will hold himself habitually at its head, 
in order to direct it according to his views. In the evo- 
lutions, he will place himself at the point whence he can 
best direct the general execution of the movement. 

In line of battle, generals of division place themselves 
at about seventy paces in rear of the centres of their di- 
visions. 



THE KEailVIENT. 4T 

In column, they hold themselves on the directing flank, 
abreast with the centres of their divisions, and at thirty 
or forty paces from the guides. 

In line of battle, generals of brigade place themselves 
at about forty paces in rear of the centre of their brigades. 

In column, they hold themselves at fifteen or twenty 
paces outsid3 the guides, and abreast with the centre of 
their brigades. 



CHAPTER V, 

THE MARCH. 

The army corps drilled and organized on the princi- 
ples thus far laid down, is in the condition for active ser- 
vice, beginning with the march. 

A badly conducted march is more injurious to the 
health and morale of troops, than any other error that 
can be committed in the progress of a campaign. If a 
table of medical statistics could be formed from the his- 
tory of various military campaigns, in which the casualties 
incident to a march were divided from those actually oc- 
curring in engagements, it would be found that a large 
proportion were due to causes which might have been 
easily prevented by the judicious management of the 
troops on a march. Military commanders have given 
to this subject too little reflection. There is no doubt 
that the efficiency of French troops displayed throughout 
every campaign, which illuminates the history of that na- 
tion of soldiers, has been due in a great measure to their 
capacity for maintaining a good physical condition. It is 
wisdom, therefore, to profit by their example. 

The commander of an expedition or of troops on a 
march, should ascertain previous to moving his force, 

1st. The exact quantity and quality of the provisions 
in the hands of the commissary. 



THE MAKCH. 49 

2d. The exact character and means of transportation. 

3d. The exact quality and quantity of reserved cloth- 
ing. 

4th. The amount of reserved ammunition of all kinds. 

5th. The character of the transportation for the sick, 
and the quantity of hospital stores and medicines. 

Should any of these be deficient, he should at once 
take means to provide for the deficiency in some way — at 
the expense of a positive delay if necessary ; recklessness 
in this respect is inexcusable, and a good commander will 
never be guilty of it. 

Besides the responsibility of the commanding officer 
in this respect, a great deal depends upon the officers in 
immediate command of regiments and companies. The 
personal habits of the men should be carefully studied, in 
order that carelessness or recklessness in regard to diet, 
clothing, or unnecessary exposure to the climate should 
be checked at once. 

All of the preliminary arrangements for the march 
having been carefully made, the " order of march " is 
communicated to the several commanding officers of di- 
visions, brigades and regiments ; but should not be pub- 
lished in orders. The troops are distributed according to 
the character of the country. In a very open country, a 
large proportion of the cavalry would be at the head of 
the column ; but generally it is distributed throughout 
the line. The artillery should be in rear of the first foot 
regiment. An advance and rear guard of mounted troops ; 
one or two companies should be detailed each day, and 
the regiment that has the right of the line one day, should 
be the next day in the rear. 

If the nature of the country will admit of it, more es- 
pecially in passing defiles or mountain gorges, a few de- 
tachments of flankers should be thrown out on the right 
3 



50 THE MARCH. 

and left of the column at the distance of one or two hun- 
dred paces, to prevent ambuscades and to keep a sharp 
lookout, to give timely notice of any signs of the enemy. 

The column having been formed at half or quarter 
distance, and the baggage train assembled in the rear, 
properly protected by a baggage guard selected from each 
regiment for its own baggage ; the column is put in mo- 
tion, and the march commences with precisely the same 
regularity as would be observed by a regiment or regi- 
ments moving in or out of a garrison town ; the bands 
playing, the light-infantry with arms sloped, and those of 
the riflemen slung over the shoulder, the officers with 
swords drawn, and exact wheeling distances of the sec- 
tions preserved, and perfect silence observed. 

After having proceeded a short distance in this man- 
ner, the word of command, " route step," is given by the 
general at the head of the leading battalion, and this is 
passed quickly on to the rear from company to company. 
The captains, instead of continuing at the head of their 
companies, drop back to the rear of them : the reasons 
for allotting this station to them is, that they may see any 
men of their respective companies who attempt to leave 
the ranks without leave. The officers and non-commis- 
sioned officers preserve the wheeling distance. The sol- 
diers now carry their arms in any manner most conven- 
ient. Some sling them over their shoulder, (most of 
them, indeed, prefer this mode as the least fatiguing,) 
others slope them, and many trail them, and they con- 
stantly change from the right hand or right shoulder to 
the left. Although allowed to prosecute the march in 
this easy and unrestrained manner, a heavy penalty, 
nevertheless, awaits the man who quits the ranks without 
permission from the captain or officer commanding his 
company. The captains are always provided with tickets 



THE MARCH. 51 

bearing their own signature ; on each is written, " The 
bearer has my pernaission to fall out of the ranks, being 
unable to proceed with the regiment." Any soldier found 
on the line of march by the rearguard, without a ticket, 
is liable to be punished for disobedience of orders ; and 
as no difficulty is ever experienced by men w^ho are sick, 
or used up, in procuring this certificate of inability to 
keep up with their regiments, such offenders certainly 
merit punishment. 

If a soldier wants to fall out of the ranks for a few 
minutes only, he is required to ask leave of the captain 
to do so, and, moreover, to take off his knapsack, and to 
give it, together with his musket, in charge of the men 
of his own section, to be carried by them until he rejoins 
them. This is an admirable order, and it operates in. two 
ways : first, the soldier is enabled, not being encumbered 
with either knapsack or musket, more speedily to over- 
take the column on its march ; and secondly, if he loiters 
unnecessarily on the way to rejoin his comrades, who are 
doubly armed with his arms and pack, he will be certain 
to incur their displeasure. 

About once in every hour and a quarter or half, a halt 
is ordered, and ten or twelve minutes allowed for the 
men to rest. When practicable, this is done on ground 
near w^hich there is water ; but it is almost unnecessary 
to add, that very frequently it is not possible to find 
such favorable spots. 

Preparatory to these temporary halts, the word of 
command, " Attention ! " is given at the head of the lead- 
ing regiment, and passes on rapidly (as already stated) 
from company to company. Upon this, the captains 
move quickly from the rear of their companies to the 
front ; the arms of the soldiers are regularly shouldered 
or slung ; perfect silence is observed ; the dressing and 



62 THE MARCH. 

the wheeling distances of the sections are correctly kept ; 
and in an instant there is a magical change from apparent 
irregularity to most perfect discipline and order. 

On resuming the march after these halts, the troops 
observe the same extreme regularity during the first hun- 
dred or two of yards. The words " route step " being 
again given, they may carry their arms in any manner. 

On approaching rivulets or shallow pieces of water, 
which it is necessary should be passed, neither officers nor 
soldiers are allowed to pick their way through, nor is the 
smallest break or irregularity permitted to exist in the 
ranks ; but the column marches through by half-sections, 
sections, or subdivisions, (according to the width of the 
ford,) preserving the same order as if moving along a 
road. 

That this regulation is, on sonae occasions, too rigidly 
enforced, has never been disputed ; still, the object a.t 
which it aims, viz., that of expending as little time as 
possible on each day's march, so as to give the soldiers 
time to take their rest, pitch their tents or construct huts 
in the bivouac, to draw their rations, and to cook their 
meals, that they miay be fresh for whatever fatigues hap- 
pen to be in store for them, is indisputably a most de- 
sirable one. 

Those who have campaigned know, that in advancing 
to attack an enemy, or in retiring before one, the passage 
of rivers in the line of march, even if so deep as to reach 
their middles, and under the fire of an enemy also, are 
expected to be crossed by the troops without a greater 
derangement taking place in their order of march than the 
obstacles which they are in the act of encountering, must 
necessarily produce in a greater or less degree. 

With a detachment consisting of a few hundred men, 
at a distance from an enemy, and with ample time before 



THE MAKCH. 53 

them to get over their day's inarch, it will appear that 
this order may well be dispensed with ; but with a divi- 
sion of four or five thousand men, the case is widely dif- 
ferent. 

Let it be supposed that it has arrived at a stream 
which admits of being passed by sections, subdivisions, 
or even by companies ; and that, instead of proceeding 
straight through it in this manner, every soldier is per- 
mitted to pick his way across in any manner he may think 
proper, and to break off from his place in the ranks, what 
a vast loss of time this will occasion ! When would the 
rear of the column have effected its passage 1 Surely the 
patience of those belonging to the front, centre, and rear 
of this body of four thousand soldiers, will be pretty well 
exhausted long before the opposite bank is gained by the 
whole, and the march resumed. 

In rugged and mountainous districts which armies 
so frequently traverse, they encounter various defiles and 
other obstacles, which preclude the possibility of their 
being passed except by a very small number of men at a 
time ; and the following mode is therefore adopted by 
each company in making its way along : The first com- 
pany of the leading battalion, as soon as it has disentan- 
gled itself from the defile, or broken ground, is directed 
to march forward, perhaps about a quarter of a mile ; 
there to stack arms, and the men to rest. The head of the 
next company, when it has cleared the defile, halts about 
thirty or forty yards on the other side, until all the men 
belonging to it come up in succession. This done, the 
captain moves it forward independently until it joins the 
leading company, where it stacks arms. Thus each com- 
pany, as soon as it has cleared the obstacles, is brought 
up en masse, and at a regular pace, without reference to 
those in its rear. By these means, that most unmilitary 



54 THE MAKCH. 

exhibition of file after file running on, like a string of wild 
geese, to catch those in their front, is entirely avoided. 

Few things tend so effectually to fatigue and irritate 
soldiers who are already jaded, as that of trotting on, 
bending under the weight of knapsack, belts, and musket, 
to overtake those who continue to march on in their front. 

When the division is about to perform a march not in 
the immediate vicinity of an enemy, the following ar- 
rangements are made either for bivouacking or quarter- 
ing it, (as the case may be,) so that no time shall be lost 
after it has reached its destination : 

A staff-officer, accompanied by the quartermaster of 
the division, or (if other duties at that moment are re- 
quired to be performed by the quartermaster) by a sub- 
altern of each regiment, precede the troops on horseback, 
so as to arrive long before them at the ground on which 
they are to halt for the day, or at the town or village in 
which it is intended they shall be quartered. 

A whole street, or part of one, (as circumstances ad- 
mit,) is allotted by the staff-officer to the quartermasters 
for each of their regiments, who immediately divide the 
street into equal portions for the different companies, re- 
serving a house or two for the staff of the regiment. 

A sergeant of every company of the division being 
sent forward so as to arrive long before the troops, and 
being told by his quartermaster how many and what 
buildings are set apart for his own company, again sub- 
divides the houses into four equal parts for each of the 
sections. 

In the event of any noise or disturbance taking place, 
whether by day or by night, the probabilities are, that 
the officers belonging to the companies where such irregu- 
larities are going on, will certainly hear it, and as instan- 
taneously put an end to it. 



THE MARCH. 55 

If, then, the division marches into a town, each com- 
pany is by its sergeant conducted to the houses allotted 
to it ; in which they are established in a very few min- 
utes. It rarely happens, therefore, that the soldiers are 
kept waiting in the streets for any length of time, as has 
too often been the case. 

Should it, on the other hand, be intended to encamp 
the division, instead of putting it into houses, arrange- 
ments of a similar nature are adopted, by sending forward 
officers and sergeants to take up the ground ; by which 
means each company marches at once up to its own ser- 
geant, on whom they form in open column. 

The rolls are immediately called ; the men first for 
duty are warned for guards, (also inlying and outlying 
pickets, if near the enemy,) for fatigue duties to draw the 
rations, to procure wood for cooking if none is near at 
hand, to go for water if no river flows near the encamp- 
ment, etc., etc. 

Tliis done, and the alarm-post, or place of general as- 
sembly, having been pointed out to every one, the men 
are dismissed ; the arms stacked, the cooking immediately 
commences, and all further parades are dispensed with for 
the day, except a roll-call about sunset. 

Parties to procure forage, whether green or dry, are 
sent out in charge of an officer as soon as the troops are 
dismissed. 

Amongst the various regulations laid down for the 
light-division, what are termed mule-guards must not be 
omitted. 

A corporal and three privates of every company, 
mount guard at nightfall, whenever the division is en- 
camped. The particular duty expected from the sentinels 
of these company guards, is to keep an eye to the baggage 
animals belonging to their officers, (which are picketed 



66 THE MARCH. 

to the trees or fastened in some manner,) and to prevent 
them from breaking loose. 

After the establishment of these little guards, but few 
instances will occur of whole troops of noisy mules, 
horses, and asses, chasing each other round and through 
the camp or bivouac, and galloping over the faces and 
bodies of the soldiers whilst they are asleep. 

Independent of their utility in this way, every com- 
pany in the division, having its own sentinel, is sure to 
be instantly apprised of any alarm during the night from 
the pickets in front ; and they are enabled, also, to com- 
municate to their respective companies, without the least 
delay, any orders arriving at the camp. 

Those only who have witnessed it, can thoroughly 
understand with what uncommon facility and despatch 
the division can suddenly get under arms, form in column 
of march, load the baggage, and proceed on the route 
marked out for it. 



CHAPTER VI. 

THE CAMP. 

Camp is the place where the troops are established in 
tents, in huts, or in bivouac. Cantonments are the in- 
habited places which troops occupy for shelter when not 
put in barracks. The camping party is a detachment de- 
tailed to prepare a camp. 

Eeconnoissances should precede the establishment of 
the camp. For a camp of troops on the march, it is only 
necessary to look to the health and comfort of the troops, 
the facility of the communications, the convenience of 
wood and water, and the resources in provisions and 
forage. The ground for an intrenched camp, or a camp 
to cover a country, or one designed to deceive the enemy 
as to the strength of the army, must be selected, and the 
camp arranged for the object in view. 

The camping-party of a regiment consists of the regi- 
mental quartermaster and quartermaster-sergeant, and a 
corporal and two men per company. The general decides 
whether the regiments camp separately or together, and 
whether the police guard shall accompany the camping 
party, or a larger escort shall be sent. 

The ground selected for an encampment either on the 
march or for a more permanent camp, should be such as 
will enable, as near as possible, the following order to be 
3* 



58 THE CAMP. 

carried out. Of course circumstances will compel a vari- 
ation from it at times : 

CAMP OF INFANTRY. 

Each company has its tents in two files, facing on a 
street perpendicular to the color line. The width of the 
street depends on the front of the camp, but should not 
be less than five paces."* The interval between the ranks 
of tents is two paces ; between the files of tents of adja- 
cent companies, two paces ; between regiments, twenty- 
two paces. 

The color line is ten paces in front of the front rank 
of tents. The kitchens are twenty paces behind the rear 
rank of company tents ; the non-commissioned staff and 
sutler, twenty paces in rear of the kitchens ; the company 
officers, twenty paces farther in rear ; and the field and 
staff*, twenty paces in rear of the company officers. 

The company officers are in rear of their respective 
companies ; the captains on the right. 

The colonel and lieutenant-colonel are near the centre 
of the line of field and staff; the adjutant, a major and 
surgeon, on the right; the quartermaster, a major and 
assistant-surgeon, on the left. 

The police guard is at the centre of the line of the 
non-commissioned staff*, the tents facing to the front, the 
stacks of arms on the left. 

The advanced post of the police guard is about two 
hundred paces in front of the color line, and opposite the 
centre of the regiment, or on the best ground ; the pris- 
oners' tent about four paces in rear. In a regiment of the 
second line, the advanced post of the police guard is two 
hundred paces in rear of the line of its field and staff! 

* The pace is thirty inches, or two-and-a-half feet. 



PLAN OF ENCAMPMENT 
IHor a iRegiment of* Iixfantry-, 



^PjySONERS. 



V^s.i^.s s\HVis. 



CdtoR^YXVCE. ^ ^ ^^^^<::v<.'5^or AnvAS 



44- 



H Qgn HQiiT!] HU Cliicij Qgd ^ ^ qjii] mii!!! |!n;|Q]| 

1 loci un jnuiii Qmi] iii!ii] uii Qsog [^i] mn i| 

i [i||n|] UH] ncg liiinii ^ ^ liiliQ iniiQ!] i][ini UQ] li 
Hi] nijii] miin) unjiii ^ ^ ^ ^ QQUjil jni][!]| nji!]]] um p 

j^oN-CoM? Staff. JPolice GUaro. SuTLEgt /^on-Com? Staff; 

n X X Dsi n m n 

Company Or/'IceRS. 

3jl mn i}[!!ii Hm HQH MM MM HH Dill] ||Ei|]!]i 

AsTSU/tf." Mai. Qi?MP IT Col. Col. JKdjT Naj. Sur^" 

BJUl fii iijiii iMii mm WM iim mnwi 

M M {l|^ pipj W fwi M M W S S 



4-00.. Paces." 



THE CAMP. 59 

The horses of the staiF officers and of the baggage train 
are twenty-five paces in rear of the tents of the field and 
staff; the wagons are packed on the same line, and the 
men of the train camped near them. 

The sinks of the men are one hundred and fifty paces 
in front of the color line ; those of the officers one hun- 
dred paces in rear of the train. Both are concealed by 
bushes. When convenient, the sinks of the men may be 
placed in rear or on a flank. A portion of the earth dug 
out for sinks to be thrown back occasionally. 

The front of the camp of a regiment of one thousand 
men in two ranks will be four hundred paces, or one-fifth 
less paces than the number of files, if the camp is to have 
the same front as the troops in order of battle. But the 
front may be reduced to one hundred and ninety paces 
by narrowing the company streets to five paces ; and if 
it be desirable to reduce the front still more, the tents of 
companies may be pitched in single file, those of a division 
facing on the same street. 



CAMP OF CAVALRY. 

In the cavalry, each company has one file of tents ; 
the tents opening on the street facing the lefl of the camp. 

The horses of each company are placed in a single file, 
facing the opening of the tents, and are fastened to pickets 
planted firmly in the ground, from three to six paces from 
the tents of the troops. 

The interval between the file of tents should be such, 
that the regiment being broken into column of companies, 
each company should be on the column extension of the 
line on which the horses are to be picketed. 

The streets separating the squadrons are wider than 
those between the companies by the interval separating 



60 THE CAMP. 

squadrons in line ; these intervals are kept free from any 
obstruction throughout the camp. 

The horses of the rear rank are placed on the left of 
those of their file-leaders. 

The horses of the lieutenants are placed on the right 
of their platoons ; those of the captains on the right of 
the company. 

Each horse occupies a space of about two paces. The 
number of horses in the company fixes the depth of the 
camp, and the distance between the files of tents ; the 
forage is placed between the tents. 

The kitchens are tw^enty paces in front of each file of 
tents. 

* The non-commissioned officers are in the tents of the 
front rank. Camp followers, teamsters, etc., are in the 
rear rank. The police guard in the rear rank, near the 
centre of the regiment. 

The tents of the lieutenants are thirty paces in rear of 
the file of their company ; the tents of the captains thirty 
paces in rear of the lieutenants. 

The colonel's tent thirty paces in rear of the captain's, 
near the centre of the regiment ; the lieutenant-colonel 
on his right ; the adjutant on his left ; the majors on the 
same line, opposite the second company on the right and 
left ; the surgeon on the left of the adjutant.* 

The field and staff* have their horses on the left of 
their tents, on the same line with the company horses ; 
sick horses are placed in one line on the right or left of 
the camp. The men who attend them have a separate 
file of tents ; the forges and wagons in rear of this file. 
The horses of the train and of camp followers are in one 

* When there is but one major to a regiment, the post of the colonel will 
be in the centre of the regiment, on the line of the field and staff; and that of 
the lieutenant-colonel in the right wing, in place of the senior major. 



THE CAMP. 61 

or more files extending to the rear, behind the right or 
left squadron. The advanced post of the police guard is 
two hundred paces in front, opposite the centre of the 
regiment ; the horses in one or two files. 

The sinks for the men are one hundred and fifty paces 
in front, those for officers one hundred paces in rear of 
the camp. 

CAMP OF ARTILLERY. 

The artillery is encamped near the troops to which 
it is i^ttached, so as to be protected from attack, and to 
contribute to the defence of the camp. Sentinels for the 
park are furnished by the artillery, and, when necessary, 
by the other troops. 

For a battery of six pieces the tents are in three files : 
one for each section ; distance betw^een the ranks of tents 
fifteen paces ; tents opening to the front. The horses of 
each section are picketed in one file, ten paces to the left 
of the file of tents. In the horse artillery, or if the num- 
ber of horses make it necessary, the horses are in two 
files on the right and left of the file of tents. The kitchens 
are twenty-five paces in front of the front rank of tents. 
The tents of the officers are in the outside files of com- 
pany tents, twenty-five paces in rear of the rear rank ; 
the captain on the right, the lieutenant on the left. 

The park is opposite the centre of the camp, forty 
paces in rear of the officers' tents. 



DUTIES IN CAMP AND GARRISON. 

The duties in camp and garrison are to be conducted, 
as far as practicable, in the same manner and on the same 
principles. 



62 THE CAMP. 

The Reveille is the signal for the men to rise, and the 
sentinel to leave off challenging. 

The Troop is to sound or beat at — o'clock in the 
morning, for the purpose of assembling the men for duty 
and inspection at guard mounting. 

The Retreat is to sound or beat at sunset, for the pur- 
pose of warning the officers and men for duty, and for 
reading the orders of the day. 

The Tattoo is to be beat at — o'clock in the evening, 
after which no soldier is to be out of his tent or quarters, 
unless by special leave. 

Peas-upon-a-trencher, the signal for breakfast, lb to 
sound or beat at — o'clock in the morning. 

Roast-heef^ the signal for dinner, is to sound or beat 
at — o'clock ; at other times it is the signal to draw pro- 
visions. 

The Surgeon! s call is to sound or beat at — o'clock, 
when the sick, able to go out, will be conducted to the 
hospital by the first sergeants of companies, who will 
hand to the surgeon a report of all the sick in the com- 
pany other than in hospital. The patients who cannot 
attend at the dispensary will be immediately after, if not 
before, visited by the surgeon. 

The General is to beat, only when the whole army is 
to march, and is the signal to strike the tents and prepare 
for the march. 

The Assembly is the signal to form by company. 

To the color is the signal to form by battalion. 

The March is for the whole to move. 

The Long roll is the signal for getting under arms, in 
case of alarm or the sudden approach of the enemy. 

The Parley is to desire a conference with the enemy. 



THE CAMP. 63 



ROLL CALLS. 

There should be daily, at least three stated roll calls ; 
viz., at reveille^ retreat^ and tattoo. They will be made on 
the company parades by the first sergeants, superintended 
by a commissioned officer of the company. The captains 
should report the absentees, without leave, to the colonel or 
commanding officer. 

Immediately after reveille roll call, (after stable duty 
in the cavalry,) the tents or quarters, and the space 
around them, will be put in order by the men of the 
companies, superintended by the chiefs of squads, and the 
guard house or guard tent by the guard or prisoners. 

The morning reports of companies, signed by the cap- 
tains and first sergeants, will be handed to the adjutant 
before eight o'clock in the morning, and will be consoli- 
dated by the adjutant within the next hour, for the infor- 
mation of the colonel ; and if the consolidation is to be 
sent to higher authority, it will be signed by the colonel 
and the adjutant. 



CHAPTER VII. 

GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 

On a march continued from day to day the ceremony 
of guard-mounting is dispensed with ; the men being 
notified the night before for the next day's guard ; and 
the guards are formed immediately after the army is in 
camp. On all other occasions the following forms are ob- 
served : 

At the first call for guard-mounting, the men warned 
for duty turn out on their company parades for inspec- 
tion by the first sergeants ; and, at the second call, re- 
pair to the regimental or garrison parade, conducted by 
the first sergeants. Each detachment, as it arrives, will, 
under the direction of the adjutant, take post on the left 
of the one that preceded it, in open order, arms shouldered 
and bayonets fixed ; the supernumeraries five paces in the 
rear of the men of their respective companies ; the first 
sergeants in rear of them. The sergeant-major will 
dress the ranks, count the files, verify the details, and 
when the guard is formed, report to the adjutant, and 
take two paces on the left of the front rank. 

The adjutant then commands Front ; when the officer 
of the guard takes post twelve paces in front of the cen- 
tre ; the sergeants, in one rank, four paces in the rear of 



GUARDS AND GUAED-MOrNTTNG. 65 

the officers ; and the corporals, in one rank, four paces 
in the rear of the sergeants, all facing to the front. The 
adjutant then assigns their places in the guard. 
The adjutant will then command, 

1. Officers and non-commissioned 2. About — Face. 

officers. 3. Inspect your guards — March. 

The non-commissioned officers then take their posts. 
The commander of the guard then commands : 

1. Order — Arms. 2. Inspection of Arms ; 

and inspects his guard. When there is no commissioned 
officer on the guard, the adjutant will inspect it. During 
inspection the band will play. 

The inspection ended, the officer of the guard takes 
post as though the guard were a company of a battalion, 
in open order, under review ; at the same time, also, the 
officers of the day will take post in front of the centre of 
the guard ; the old officer of the day three paces on the 
right of the new officer of the day, one pace retired. 

The adjutant will then command, 

1. Parade — Rest. 2. Troop — Beat Off ; 

when the music, beginning on the right, will beat down 
the line in front of the officer of the guard to the left, and 
back to its place on the right, where it will cease to play. 
The adjutant then commands, 

1, Attention. 2. Shoulder — Arms. 3. Close order — March. 

At the word ^^ Close order," the officer will face about ; 
at " March," resume his post in line. The adjutant then 
commands : 

Present — Arms ; 

at which he will face to the new officer of the day, salute, 
and report, " Sir, the guard is forraedP The new officer 



66 GTJAKBS AND GUAKD-MOTJNTING. 

of the day, after acknowledging the salute, will direct the 
adjutant to inarch the guard in review, or by flank, to 
its post. But if the adjutant be senior to the officer of 
the day, he will report without saluting with the sword 
then, or when marching the guard in review. 

In review the guard march past the officer of the day, 
according to the order of review, conducted by the ad- 
jutant, marching on the left of the first division ; the 
sergeant-major on the left of the last division. 

When the column has passed the officer of the day, 
the officer of the guard marches it to its post, the adjutant 
and sergeant-major retiring. The music, which has 
wheeled out of the column, and taken post opposite to 
the officer of the day, will cease, and the old officer of the 
day salute, and give the old or standing orders to the 
new officer of the day. The supernumeraries, at the same 
time, will be marched by the first sergeants to their re- 
spective company parades, and dismissed. 

In bad weather or at night, or after fatiguing marches, 
the ceremony of turning off may be dispensed with, but 
not the inspection. 

Grand guards and other brigade guards are organized 
and mounted on the brigade parade by the staff officers 
of the parade, under the direction of the field officer of 
the day of the brigade, according to the principles here 
prescribed for the police guard of a regiment. The de- 
tail of each regiment is assembled on the regimental pa- 
rade, verified by the adjutant, and marched to the brigade 
parade by the senior officer of the detail. After inspec- 
tion and review, the officer of the day directs the several 
guards to their respective posts. 

The officer of the old guard, having his guard paraded, 
on the approach of the new guard, commands ; 
Present — Arms. 



GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 67 

The new guard will march, in quick time, past the 
old guard, at shouldered arms^ officers saluting, and take 
post four paces on its right, "where, being alligned with 
it, its commander will order : 

Present — Arms. 

The two officers will then approach each other and 
salute. They will then return to their respective guards, 
and command : 

1. Shoulder — Arms. 2. Order — Arms. 

The officer of the new guard will now direct the de- 
tail for the advanced guard to be formed and marched to 
its post, the list of the guard made and divided into three 
reliefs, experienced soldiers placed over the arms of the 
guard and at the remote and responsible posts, and the 
young soldiers in posts near the guard for instruction in 
their duties, and will himself proceed to take possession 
of the guard-house or guard-tent, and the articles and 
prisoners in charge of the guard. 

During the time of relieving the sentinels and of call- 
ing in the small posts, the old commander will give to 
the new all the information and instruction relating to his 
post. 

The first relief having been designated and ordered 
two paces to the front, the corporal of the new guard will 
take charge of it, and go to relieve the sentinels, accom- 
panied by the corporal of the old guard, who will take 
command of the old sentinels, when the whole are relieved. 

If the sentinels are numerous, the sergeants are to be 
employed, as well as the corporals, in relieving them. 

The relief, with arms at a support, in two ranks, will 
march by a flank, conducted by the corporal on the side 
of the leading front-rank man ; and the men will be num- 
bered alternately in the front and rear rank, the man on 



68 GUAKDS AND GUAKD-MOTJNTING. 

the right of the front rank being No. 1. Should an of- 
ficer approach, the corporal will command : Carry arms^ 
and resume the support arms when the officer is passed. 

The sentinels at the guard-house or guard-tent will be 
the first relieved and left behind ; the others are relieved 
in succession. 

When the sentinel sees the relief approaching, he will 
halt and face to it, with his arms at a shoulder. At six 
paces, the corporal will command : 

1. Relief, 2. Halt; 

w^hen the relief will halt and carry arms. The corporal 
will then add, " No. 1," or " No. 2," or " No 8," accord- 
ing to the number of the post : 

Arms — Port. 

The two sentinels will, with arms at port^ then ap- 
proach each other, when the old sentinel, under the di- 
rection of the corporal, will whisper the instructions to 
the new sentinel. This done, the tw^o sentinels will shoul- 
der arms, and the old sentinel will pass, in quick time, to 
his place in rear of the relief. The corporal will then 
command : 

1 . Support — Arms. 2. Forward, 8. March ; 

and the relief proceeds in the same manner until the whole 
are relieved. 

The detachments and sentinels from the old guard 
having come in, it will be marched, at shouldered arms^ 
along the front of the new guard, in quick time, the new 
guard standing at presented arms ; officers saluting, and 
the music of both guards beating, except at the outposts. 

On arriving at the regimental or garrison parade, the 
commander of the old guard will send the detachments 
composing it, under charge of the non-commissioned 



GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 69 

officers, to their respective regiments. Before the men 
are dismissed, their pieces will be drawn or discharged at 
a target. On rejoining their companions, the chiefs of 
squads v/ill examine the arms, etc., of their men, and 
cause the whole to be put away in good order. 

When the old guard has marched off fifty paces, the 
officer of the new guard will order his men to stack their 
arms, or place them in the arm-racks. 

The commander of the guard will then make himself 
acquainted with all the instructions for his post, visit the 
sentinels, and question them and the non-commissioned 
officers relative to the instructions they may have received 
from other persons of the old guard. 

Sentinels wdll be relieved every two hours, unless the 
state of the weather or other causes should make it neces- 
sary or proper that it be done at shorter or longer in- 
tervals. 

Each relief, before mounting, is inspected by the com- 
mander of the guard or of its post. The corporal reports 
to him, and presents the old relief on its return. 

The countersign or watchword is given to such persons 
as are entitled to pass during the night, and tO officers, 
non-commissioned officers, and sentinels of the guard. 
Interior guards receive the countersign only when ordered 
by the commander of the troops. 

The parole is imparted to such officers only as have a 
right to visit the guards and to n^ake the grand rounds, 
and to officers commanding guards. 

As soon as the new guard has been marched off, the 
officer of the day will repair to the office of the command- 
ing officer and report for orders. 

The officer of the day must see that the officer of the 
guard is furnished with the parole and countersign before 
retreat. 



70 GUARDS AND GUAKD-MOUNTIKG. 

The oflicer of the day visits the guards during the day 
at such times as he may deem necessary, and makes his 
rounds at night, at least once after twelve o'clock. 

Upon being relieved, the officer of the day will make 
such remarks in the report of the officer of the guard as 
circumstances require, and present the same at head- 
cparters. 

Commanders of guards leaving their posts to visit 
their sentinels, or on other duty, are to mention their in- 
tention, and the probable time of their absence, to the 
next in command. 

The officers are to remain constantly at their guards, 
except while visiting their sentinels, or necessarily engaged 
elsewhere on their proper duty. 

Neither officers nor soldiers are to take off their cloth- 
ing or accoutrements while they are on guard. 

The officer of the guard must see that the countersign 
is duly communicated to the sentinels a little before twi- 
light. 

When a fire breaks out, or any alarm is raised in a 
garrison, all guards are to be immediately under arms. 

Inexperienced officers are put on guard as supernu- 
meraries, for the purpose of instruction. 

Sentinels will not take orders or allow themselves to 
be relieved, except by an officer or non-commissioned 
officer of their guard or party, the officer of the day or 
the commanding officer ; in which case the orders will be 
immediately communicated to the commander of the 
guard by the officer giving them. 

Sentinels will report every breach of orders or regula- 
tions they are instructed to enforce. 

Sentinels must keep themselves on the alert, observing 
every thing that takes place within sight and hearing of 
their post. They will carry their arms habitually at sup- 



GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 71 

port, or on either shoulder, but will never quit them. In 
wet weather, if there be no sentry-box, they will secure 
arms. 

No sentinel shall quit his post, or hold conversation 
not necessary to the discharge of his duty. 

All persons, of whatever rank in the service, are re- 
quired to observe respect toward sentinels. 

In case of disorder, a sentinel must call out, Tlie 
'Guard! and if a fire takes place, he must cry " Fire ! " 
adding the number of his post. If, in either case, the 
danger be great, he must discharge his piece before call- 
ing out. 

It is the duty of a sentinel to repeat all calls made 
from posts more distant from the main body of the guard 
than his own, and no sentinel will be posted so distant as 
not to be heard by the guard, either directly or through 
other sentinels. 

Sentinels will present arms to general and field officers, 
to the officer of the day, and to the commanding officer of 
the post. To all other officers they will carry arms. 

When a sentinel, in his sentry-box, sees an officer ap- 
proaching, he will stand at attention., and, as the officer 
passes, will salute him, by bringing the left hand briskly 
to the musket, as high as the right shoulder. 

The sentinel, at any post of the guard, when he sees 
any body of troops, or an officer entitled to compliment, 
approach, must call, '' Turn out the guard ! " and announce 
who approaches. 

Guards do not turn out, as a matter of compliment, 
after sunset ; but sentinels will, when officers in uniform 
approach, pay them proper attention, by flicing to the 
proper front and standing steady at shouldered arms. 
This will be observed until the evening is so far advanced 
that the sentinels be2:in challena;in<T. 



72 GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 

After retreat, (or the hour appointed by the command- 
ing officer,) until broad daylight, a sentinel challenges 
every person who approaches him, taking, at the same 
time, the position of arms port. He will suffer no person 
to come nearer than within reach of his bayonet, until the 
person has given the countersign. 

A sentinel, in challenging, vvill call out, " WJio comes 
there P"* If answered, ^' Friend^ ivith the countersign^'^ 
and he be instructed to pass persons with the countersign, ' 
he will reply, '* Advance, friend, with the countersign." 
If answered ''^ Friends i^'^ he will reply, ^' Halt^ friends! 
Advance^ one^ with the countersign!''' If answered *^ij?6- 
Z^>/," "Patrol,^'' or ''Grand rounds,^^ he will reply, "Halt! 
Advance, sergeant {or corporal), loith the countersign^"* 
and satisfy himself that the party is what it represents it- 
self to be. If he have no authority to pass persons with 
the countersign, if the wrong countersign be given, or if 
the persons have not the countersign, he will cause them 
to stand, and call, "Corporal of the guard! " 

In the daytime, when the sentinel before the guard 
sees the officer of the day approach, he will call, "Turn 
out the guard! Officer of the day !''"' The guard will be 
paraded, and salute with presented arms. 

When any person approaches a post of the guard at 
night, the sentinel before the post, after challenging, causes 
him to halt, until examined by a non-commissioned officer 
of the guard. If it be the officer of the day, or any other 
officer entitled to inspect the guard and to make the 
rounds, the non-commissioned officer will call, "Turn out 
the guard !^^ when the guard will be paraded at shoul- 
dered arms, and the officer of the guard, if he thinks neces- 
sary, may demand the countersign and parole. 

The officer of the day, wishing to make the rounds, will 
take an escort of a non-commissioned officer and two men. 



GUARDS AND aUARD-MOUNTENTG. 73 

When the rounds are challenged by a sentinel, the ser- 
geant will answer, " Grand rounds ! " and the sentinel 
will reply, "Halt, grand rounds! Advance, sergeant, 
with the countersign ! " Upon which the sergeant ad- 
vances and gives the countersign. The sentinel will then 
cry, ^'Advance, rounds ! " and stand at a shoulder till they 
Ifave passed. 

When the sentinel before the guard challenges, and is 
answered, ''Grand rounds,^'' he will reply, ""Halt, ground 
rounds ! Turn out the guard ; grand rounds ! " Upon 
which the guard will be drawn up at shouldered arms. 
The officer commanding the guard will then order a ser- 
geant and 'two men to advance ; when within ten paces, 
the sergeant challenges. The sergeant of the grand rounds 
answers, ''Grand rounds ! ^'^ The sergeant of the guard 
replies, "Advance, sergeant, with the countersign!'''^ The 
sergeant of the rounds advances alone, gives the counter- 
sign, and returns to his round. The sergeant of the guard 
calls to- his officer, "The countersign is right! " on which 
the officer of the guard calls, "Advaiice, rounds ! " The 
officer of the rounds then advances alone, the guard stand- 
ing at shouldered arms. The officer of the rounds passes 
along in front of the guard to the officer, who keeps his 
post on the right, and gives him the parole. Pie then ex- 
amines the guard, orders back his escort, and, taking a 
new one, proceeds in the same manner to other guards. 

All material instructions given to a sentinel on post, 
by persons entitled to make grand rounds, ought to 
be promptly communicated to the commander of the 
guard. 

'Any general officer^ or the commander of a post or 
garrison, may visit the guards of his command, and go 
the grand rounds, and be received in the same mamier as 
prescribed for the officer of the day. 
4 



7ti GUAKDS AND GUARD-MOUNTmO. 



PICKET GUARD. 

The picket guard is stationed at some advantageous 
point in advance of the main body for the purpose of 
watching the enemy, to intercept the passage of couriers 
or small parties, to give notice of the approach of any 
considerable force, and to intercept them, if possible, by 
Huch a show as will cause sufficient delay to enable the 
fact to be communicated at head-quarters. The strength 
of a picket guard depends upon the position they are sent 
to occupy, and the proximity of the enemy. The point 
occupied should be susceptible of some defence. The 
picket should be relieved every day ; if not, the fact should 
be known when the guard is posted. 

All out guards stand to arms at night on the approach 
of patrols, rounds, or other parties ; the sentinel of the 
arms will call them out. 

The sentinels and videttes are placed on points from 
which they can see furthest, taking care not to break their 
connection with each other, or with their post. They are 
concealed from the enemy as much as possible by walls 
or trees or elevated ground. It is generally of more ad- 
vantage not to be seen than to see far. A sentinel should 
always be ready to fire, and when once satisfied of the 
presence of an enemy, he should fire, although all defence 
on his part were useless, since the safety of the post may 
depend upon it. 

PRISONERS. 

The prisoners under charge of a guard should not be 
allowed to hold extended communication wdth each other 
or with the men on guard. They should be forced to 
maintain the utmost decorum, and a disturbance of any 



GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 



75 



kind should be checked at once by the application of the 
most efficient means. On the march the prisoners are 
placed in charge of the old picket guard with bayonets 
fixed and arms loaded. They march in the centre of the 
regiment. On reaching camp, they are turned over to 
the new guard as soon as posted. 



LIST OF PRISONERS. 


No. 


Names. 


a 

e3 

i 


a 


Confined. 


Charges. 


Sentences. 


Remarks. 


When. 


whom. 


1 
2 
3 
4 
5 



















B. C, 

Lieutenant 1st Regiment^ 

Commanding the Guard, 



FORM OF GUARD REPORT. 




on the , and relieved 


on 


Me 


Parole. 


-2 


1 


Q 


1 


> 


3 

o 


1 

1 

<1 


Articles in 
Charge. 


Rec'd the forego- 
ing articles: 

A. B , 

Regim&iit 


- 


- 


- 




1 

1 

1 

i 
i 


Detail. 

















70 



GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 



a 






e 

o 






03 •;■ . 



b^<y 



■a •s •s 

00 c^ o 



O ft HH 



fi; P^ H 
6 <yzn 



'Ti nS '^ 
00 <M lO 



ft H fe* 



^ H^ ^ 
HH W ^ 



-*^ rTj j:3 

rH -sdH C£> 



<1 pq Q 



Q fi; W 

d W O 






P^ 



fcJO gn Ph 

^ fe 5::! 

O O O 

c/2 O O 



CHAPTER VIII. 

RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 

The history of military campaigns develops no fact 
more striking, than that a very large percentage of the 
casualties are those of diseases incident to an improper 
diet. Especially was this made evident in the Mexican 
War among the volunteer troops : called suddenly from 
the pursuits of civil life, and from the comforts and con- 
veniences of home, they were transferred at once to a cli- 
mate, different in every respect to that in which they had 
always lived. Exposed to every change of weather, from 
the intense heat of the plains, to the piercing cold of the 
mountains ; sleeping constantly in the open air ; they 
universally exhibited that vrant of discretion in regard to 
their food, the manner of cooking it, and time of eating 
it, which would naturally be expected from men who had 
never been called upon to give the slightest thought to 
the subject. 

In the case of the regular troops, it was considered a 
part of the duties of the officers in immediate command to 
watch the soldiers in this particular, and to prevent them 
from eating unripe fruit or other improper food, which 
they procured along the march. This surveillance was 
found to be the more necessary during the temporary oc- 



78 RATIOIs^S, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 

cupation of towns, as it was there so very easy to pro- 
cure something to eat without the trouble of cooking it. 
In addition to all this, it was found to be generally the 
case that the ration was badly cooked at the regular mess, 
owing to a want of knowledge of the time required for 
the different articles of food to be properly cooked. 

The Crimean War w^as another example of the same 
fatal error, and so palpable did it become, that the War 
Department of Great Britain w^as induced to send out to 
the seat of war competent persons to instruct the troops 
in the manner of cooking their rations. The beneficial 
effects of this step were at once exhibited in the improved 
condition of the health of the army. 

With a view to obviate a large portion of discomfort 
and disease in this particular, a number of receipts have 
been prepared : 

1st. For cooking the ration as issued to the troops ; 

2d. For cooking such food, other than the ration, as 
may be obtained in the field, and 

3d. For hospital diets for the use of the sick. 

The regular daily ration of food issued to the troops 
in the United States service, is three-fourths of a pound 
of pork or bacon, or one and a fourth pounds of fresh or 
salt beef; eighteen ounces of bread or flour, or twelve 
ounces of hard bread, or one and a fourth pounds of corn 
meal, and at the rate, to one hundred rations, of eight 
quarts of peas or beans, or, in lieu thereof, ten pounds of 
rice ; six pounds of coffee ; twelve pounds of sugar ; four 
quarts of vinegar, one and a half pounds of tallow, or one 
and a fourth pounds of adamantine, or one pound sperm 
candles ; four pounds of soap, and two quarts of salt. 

On a campaign, or on marches, or on board transports, 
the ration of hard bread is one pound. 

Fresh beef, when it can be procured, should be fur- 



EATIO^^S, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 79 

nished at least twice a week ; the beef to be procured, if 
possible, by contract. 

RECEIPTS. 

1st. — Soldiers^ Soup for 25 men, 

15 quarts of water to 25 pounds of meat, 2 small ta- 
ble-spoonsful of salt, half a one of pepper. About 2 pounds 
of rice put in while boiling, and what vegetables fresh or 
preserved that can be procured — say 3 pounds. 

2d. — Pork Soup for 25 men. 

In 6 gallons of cold water put 12 pounds of pork, 3 
quarts of beans, 2 pounds of rice, season to suit ; let boil 
one hour and a half. Soak the beans over night. 

3d. — Irish Steiu for 25 men. 

25 pounds of mutton, veal, beef or pork, cut into 
pieces six inches square, 4 pounds of onions, 8 pounds po- 
tatoes, 4 table-spoonsful of salt, 1 of pepper ; add 8 quarts 
of water. Cook it from one to two hours slowly, thicken 
the gravy with flour mixed into a smooth paste with water 
or potatoes, mashed fine. 

4th. — Tea for 25 men. 

Allow 12 quarts of water ; put the rations of tea — a 
large teaspoonful to each — in a cloth tied up very loosely, 
throw it into the boiler while it is boiling hard for a mo- 
ment. Then take off the boiler, cover it, and let it stand 
full ten minutes, when it will be ready to use ; first add 
sugar and milk if to be had, at the rate of 3 pints or 2 
quarts of milk, and a pound or a pound and a half of 
sugar. 



80 RATIONS, AKD MODE OF COOKING THEM. 

5th. — Pork with Peas or Beans for 25 men. 

To 14 pounds of pork add 6 pounds of peas or beans, 
put them in a cloth to boil, tying it very loosely, place 
them both in the boiler ; let them boil about two hours. 
Then take out the pork, add some flour to the gravy, and 
put the peas or beans in it with two or three onions cut 
up fine ; let it boil a little longer, mash up the vegetables 
very finely, and serve them round the dish with the meat. 

6th. — Plain Stewed Meat for 25 men. 

Take 14 pounds of mutton, beef, veal or pork, cut it 
into chunks and put it in the boiler. Add 4 quarts of 
water, 2 quarts to a teaspoonful of salt, and half a tea- 
spoonful of pepper, 8 or 1 onions cut in pieces ; let it 
boil half an hour, then let it stew slowly from half an hour 
to an hour longer, adding 1 pound of rice, potatoes, or any 
vegetable that can be obtained ; thicken the gravy with 
flour mixed to a smooth paste in cold water. 

7th. — Stewed Salt Pork or Beef for 25 men. 

Wash the meat well, let it soak all night, wash out the 
salt as much as possible ; 8 pounds of salt beef, 5 pounds 
of salt pork, -^ of a pound of sugar, 2 pounds of sliced 
onions, 6 quarts of water, and a pound of rice ; let it sim- 
mer gently for two or three hours. 

8th. — Salt Pork luith Potatoes and Cabbage for 25 men. 

Take 15 pounds of pork, extract the bones, 3 pounds 
/)f potatoes, 2 winter cabbages, let it boil for two hours ; 
10 quarts of w^ater. Serve the meat with vegetables 
round it. The gravy will make a good broth with peas, 
beans, or rice added, also a little onion. Ship biscuit 
broken into the broth makes a very nutritious soup. 



RATIO:iS^S, AND IMODE OF COOXIXG THEM. 81 

9tli. — To Fry any hind of Meat. 

Get your frying-pan very hot, put in some fat pork 
\Yhich will immediately melt, then put in the meat you 
wish to fry, (a small teaspoonful of salt and a quarter of 
a teaspoonful of pepper to every pound of meat.) When 
done, lay the meat on a dish, add a pint of w^ater to the 
fat in the frying-pan, a few slices of onions, or 2 teaspoons- 
ful of vinegar ; thicken it w^ ith a little flour and pour it 
over the cooked meat. Any sauce, or a few chopped 
pickles, may be substituted for the vinegar or onions. 

10th. — Coffee for 25 men. 

Take 12 quarts of Vfater, when it boils add 20 ounces 
of coffee, mix it well and leave it on the fire till it com- 
mences to boil ; then take it off, and pour into it a little 
more than a quart of cold water ; let it stand in a warm 
place full ten minutes ; the dregs will settle at the bottom 
and the coffee be perfectly clear. Pour it then into an- 
other vessel, leaving the dregs in the first ; add sugar, 4 
teaspoonsful to the quart. If you can get milk, leave out 
five quarts of water in the above receipt, and put milk in 
its place. 

11th. — Peas or Bean Soup for 25 men. 

Take 14 pounds of pork, 8 quarts of peas or beans, 20 
quarts of w^ater, 25 teaspoonsful of sugar, 12 of pepper, 
and several large onions ; boil gently till the vegetables 
are soft, from four to five hours. 

12th. — Receipt for a small quantity of mashed Meat, 

Cut the meat in very small pieces ; heat the frying- 
pan, put into it half a pint of water, half a teaspoonful of 
salt, and a teaspoonful of flour, and let it cook fifteen min- 



82 EATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING TIIEM. 

utes. Salt meat can be cooked the same, omitting the 
salt ; in its place putting a small spoonful of sugar, spices, 
or pickles, chopped fine, dish it on to some ship biscuit. 
Steak, chops, sausages, bacon slices of any kind of meat 
can be cooked in a frying-pan, with a little melted fat at 
the bottom. Salt meat should always be soaked. 



HOSPITAL DIETS. 

No. 1. — Semi-siewed Mutton and Barley Soup for 100 

men. 

Put in a convenient-sized caldron 130 pints of cold 
water, 70 pounds of meat, or about that quantity, 12 
pounds of plain mixed vegetables, (the best that can be 
obtained,) 9 pounds 6 ounces of barley, 1 pound 7 ounces 
of salt, 1 pound 4 ounces of flour, 1 pound 4 ounces of 
sugar, 1 ounce of pepper. Put all the ingredients into 
the pan at once, except the flour ; set it on the fire, and 
when beginning to boil, diminish the heat, and simmer gen- 
tly for two hours and a half; take the joints of meat out, 
and keep them warm in the orderly's pan ; add to the 
soup your flour, which you have mixed with enough water 
to form a light batter ; stir well together with a large 
spoon ; boil another half hour, skim off* the fat, and serve 
the soup and meat separate. The meat may be put back 
into the soup for a few minutes to warm again prior to 
serving. The soup should be stirred now and then while 
making, to prevent burning or sticking to the bottom of 
the caldron. 

Note. — ^The word *^ about'' is applied to the half and full diet, 
which varies the weight of the meat ; but -^ lb. of mutton will 
always make a pint of good soup : 3 lbs. of mixed preserved vege- 
tables must be used when fresh are not to be obtained, and put in 
one hour and a half prior to serving, instead of at first -^ they will 
then show better in the soup, and still be well done. 



83 

The joints are cooked whole, and afterwards cut up in 
different messes ; being cooked this way, in a rather thick 
stock, the meat becomes more nutritious. 

All the following receipts may be increased to large 
quantities, but by all means closely follow the weight 
and measure. 

No. 2,— Beef Soup, 

Proceed the same as for mutton, only leave the meat 
in till serving, as it will take longer than mutton. The 
pieces are not to be above 4 or 5 pounds weight, and for 
a change half rice may be introduced ; the addition of 2 
pounds more will make it thicker and more nutritive ; 
\ pound of curry powder will make an excellent change 
also. To vary the same, half a pint of burnt sugar water 
may be added ; it will give the soup a very rich brown 
color. 

' No. 3. — Beef Tea, Receipt for 6 pints. 

Cut 3 pounds of beef into pieces the size of walnuts, 
and chop up the bones, if any ; put it into a convenient- 
sized kettle, with |- pound of mixed vegetables, such as 
onions, leeks, celery, turnips, carrots, (or one or two of 
these, if all are not to be obtained,) one ounce of salt, a 
little pepper, 1 teaspoonful of sugar, 2 ounces of butter, 
half a pint of water. Set it on a sharp fire for ten minutes 
or a quarter of an hour, stirring now and then with a 
spoon, till it forms a rather thick gravy at bottom, but 
not brown ; then add 7 pints of hot or cold water, but hot 
is preferable ; when boiling, let it simmer gently for an 
hour ; skim off all the fat, strain it through a sieve, and 
serve. 



Si 

No. 4:.— Thick Beef Tea. 

Dissolve a good teaspoonful of arrowroot in a gill of 
water, and pour it into the beef tea twenty minutes before 
passing through the sieve ; it is then ready. 

No. 5. — Strengthening Beef Tea with Calves-foot Jelly or 
Isinglass, 

Add \ ounce calves-foot gelatine to the above quantity 
of beef tea previous to serving, when cooking. 

No. 6. — Mutton and Veal Tea, 

Mutton and veal will make good tea by proceeding 
precisely the same as above. The addition of a little aro- 
matic herbs is always desirable. If no fresh vegetables 
are at hand, use 2 ounces of mixed preserved vegetables 
to any of the above receipts. 

No. 1,— Chicken Broth, 

Put in a stew-pan a fowl, 3 pints of water, 2 tea- 
spoonsful of rice, 1 teaspoonful of salt, a middle-sized 
onion, or 2 ounoes of mixed vegetables ; boil the whole 
gently for three-quarters of an hour ; if an old fowl, sim- 
mer from one hour and a half to two hours, adding one 
pint more water ; skim off the fat, and serve. A small 
fowl will do. 

Note. — A light mutton broth may be made precisely the same, 
by using a pound and a half of scrag of mutton instead of fowl. 

For thick mutton broth proceed as for thick beef tea, omitting 
the rice ; a table-spoonful of burnt sugar water will give a rich 
color to the broth. 

No. 8. — Plain Boiled Rice, 

Put 2 quarts of water in a stew-pan, with a teaspoon- 
ful of salt ; when boiling, add to it ^ pound of rice, well 



RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING- THEM. 85 

washed ; boil for ten minutes, or till each grain becomes 
rather soft ; drain it into a colander, slightly grease the 
pot with butter, and put the rice back into it ; let it swell 
slowly for about twenty minutes near the fire, or in a 
slow oven ; each grain will then swell up, and be well 
separated ; it is then ready for use. 

No. 9, — Sweet Rice, 

Add to' the plain boiled rice 1 ounce of butter, 2 table- 
spoonsful of sugar, a little cinnamon, a quarter of a pint 
of milk ; stir it with a fork, and serve ; a little currant- 
jelly or jam may be added to the rice. 

No. 10. — Rice ivitli Gravy, 

Add to the rice 4 table-spoonsful of the essence of 
beef, a little butter, if fresh, half a teaspoonful of salt ; 
stir together with a fork, and serve. - 

No. 11. — Plain Oatmeal, 

Put in a pan \ pound of oatmeal, 1^ ounce of sugar, 
half a teaspoonful of salt, and 3 pints of water ; boil slowly 
.for twenty minutes, stirring continually, and serve. A 
quarter of a pint of boiled milk, an ounce of butter, and a 
little pounded ciunamon or spice added previous to serv- 
ing, is a good variation. 

This receipt has been found most useful at the com- 
mencement of dysentery, by medical authorities. 

No. 12. — Calves-foot Jelhj. 

Put in a proper-sized stew-pan 2^ ounces of calves-foot 
gelatine, 4 ounces of white sugar, 4 whites of eggs and 
shells, the peel of a lemon, the juice of 3 middle-sized 
lemons, half a pint of Marsala wine ; beat all well together 



60 KAllONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 

with the egg-beater for a few minutes, then add 4|- pints 
of cold water ; set it on a slow fire, and keep whipping it 
till boiling. Set it on the corner of the stove, partly cov- 
ered with the lid, upon which you place a few pieces of 
burning charcoal ; let it simmer gently for ten minutes, 
and strain it through a jelly-bag. It is then ready to put 
in the ice or some cool place. Sherry will do if Marsala 
is not at hand. 

For orange jelly use only 1 lemon and 2 oranges. 
Any delicate flavor may be introduced. 

Jelly Stock, 

made from calves' feet, requires to be made the day pre- 
vious to being used, requiring to be very hard to extract 
the fat. Take two calves' feet, cut them up, and boil in 3 
quarts of w^ater ; as soon as it boils remove it to the cor- 
ner of the fire, and simmer for five hours, keeping it skim- 
med ; pass through a hair-sieve into a basin, and let it re- 
main until quite hard ; then remove the oil and fat, and 
w^ipe the top dry. Place in a stew-pan half a pint of 
water, 1 of sherry, half a pound of lump sugar, the juice 
of 4 lemons, the rinds of 2, and the w^hites and shells of 
5 eggs ; w^hisk until the sugar is melted, then add the 
jelly, place it on the fire, and whisk until boiling, pass it 
through a jelly-bag, pouring that back again which comes 
through first, until quite clear ; it is then ready for use, 
by putting it in moulds or glasses. Vary the flavor ac- 
cording to flmcy. 

No. 13. — Sago Jelly, 

Put into a pan 3 ounces of sago, 1|- ounce of soft 
sugar, half a lemon peel cut very thin, ^ teaspoonful of 
ground cinnamon, or a small stick of the same; put to it 



EATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 87 

3 pints of water and a little salt ; boil ten minutes, or 
rather longer, stirring continually until rather thick, then 
add a little port, sherry, or Marsala wine ; mix well, and 
serve hot or cold. 

No. 14. — Arrowroot MilJc, 

Put into a pan 4 ounces of arrowroot, 3 ounces of su- 
gar, the peel of half a lemon, J teaspoonful of salt, 2^ 
pints of milk ; set it on the fire, stir round gently, boil 
for ten minutes, and serve. If no lemons are at hand, a 
little essence of any kind will do. 

When short of milk, use half water ; half an ounce of 
fresh butter is an improvement before serving. If required 
thicker, put a little milk. 

No. 15. — Thick Arrowroot Panada, 

Put in a pan 5 ounces of arrowroot, 2|- ounces of white 
sugar, the peel of half a lemon, a quarter of a teaspoonful 
of salt, 4 pints of water ; mix all well, set on the fire, 
boil for ten minutes ; it is then ready. The juice of a 
lemon is an improvement ; a gill of wine may also be in- 
troduced, and -J- ounce of calves-foot gelatine previously 
dissolved in water will be strengthening. Milk, however, 
is preferable, if at hand. 

No. 16. — Arrowroot Water, 

Put into a pan 3 ounces of arrowroot, 2 ounces of 
white sugar, the peel of a lemon, \ teaspoonful of salt, 4 
pints of water ; mix well, set on the fire, boil for ten min- 
utes. It is then ready to serve either hot or cold. 

No. 17. — Rice Water, 

Put 7 pints of water to boil, add to it 2 ounces of rice 
washed, 2 ounces of sugar, the peel of two-thirds of a lem- 



88 RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 

on ; boil gently for three-quarters of an hour ; it will re- 
duce to 5 pints ; strain through a colander ; it is then 
ready. 

The rice may be left in the beverage or made into a 
pudding, or by the addition of a little sugar or jam^ will 
be found very good for either children or invalids. 

No. 18. — Barley Water, 

Put in a saucepan 7 pints of water, 2 ounces of barley, 
which stir now and then w^hile boiling ; add 2 ounces of 
white sugar, the rind of half a lemon, thinly peeled ; let 
it boil gently for about two hours, without covering it ; 
pass it through a sieve or colander ; it is then ready. . 
The barley and lemon may be left in. 

No. 19. — Plain Lemonade. 

Thinly peel the third part of a lemon, which put into 
a basin with 2 table-spoonsful of sugar ; roll the lemon 
with your hand upon the table to soften it ; cut it into 
two, lengthwise, squeeze the juice over the peel, &c., stir 
round for a minute with a spoon to form a sort of syrup ; 
pour over a pint of water, mix well, and remove the pips ; 
it is then ready for use. If a very large lemon, and full 
of juice, and very fresh, you may make a pint and a half 
to a quart, adding sugar and peel in proportion to the in- 
crease of water. The juice only of the lemon and sugar 
will make lemonade, but will then be deprived of the 
aroma which the rind contains, the said rind being gen- 
erally thrown away. 

No. 20. — Semi-citric Lemonade, Receipt for 50 pints. 

Put 1 ounce of citric acid to dissolve in a pint of w^a- 
ter ; peel 20 lemons thinly, and put the peel in a large 



RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 89 

vessel, with 3 pounds 2 ounces of white sugar well broken ; 
roll each lemon on the table to soften it, which will facili- 
tate the extraction of the juice ; cut thern into two, and 
press out the juice into a colander or sieve, over the peel 
and sugar, then pour half a pint of water through the 
colander, so as to leave no juice remaining ; triturate the 
sugar, juice, and peel together for a minute or two with a 
spoon, so as to form a sort of syrup, and extract the aroma 
from the peel and the dissolved citric acid ; mix all well 
together, pour on 50 pints of cold water, stir well togeth- 
er ; it is then ready. A little ice in summer is a great 
addition. 



No. 21. — Cheap Lemonade, 

Put into a basin 2 table-spoonsful of white or brown 
sugar, half a table-spoonful of lime juice ; mix well togeth- 
er for one minute, add 1 pint of water, and the beverage 
is ready. A drop of rum will make a good variation, as 
lime juice and rum are daily issued to the soldiers. 

No. 22. — Tartaric Lemonade, 

Dissolve 1 ounce of crystallized tartaric acid in a pint 
of cold water, which put in a large vessel ; when dis- 
solved, add 1 pound 9 ounces of white or brown sugar — 
the former is preferable ; mix well to form a thick syrup ; 
add to it 24 pints of cold v/ater, slowly mixing well \ it 
is then ready. 

It maybe strained through either a colander or a jelly- 
bag ; if required very light, add 5 pints more water, and 
sugar in pr'oportion ; if citric acid be used, put only 20 
pints of water to each ounce. 



90 EATIOKS, A2n) MODE OF COOKING THEM. 

No. 23. — Toast and Water. 

Cut a piece of crusty bread, about \ pound in weight, 
place it upon a toasting-fork, and hold it about six inches 
from the fire ; turn it often, and keep moving it gently 
until of a light yellow color, then place it nearer the fire, 
and w^hen of a good brown chocolate color, put it in a jug 
and pour over 3 pints of boiling water ; cover the jug 
until cold, then strain it in a clean jug, and it is ready for 
use. Never leave the toast in it, for in summer it would 
cause fermentation in a short time. I would almost ven^ 
ture to say that such toast and water should be made, and 
that it would keep good a considerable time in bottles. 

THE CAMP STOVE. 

The arrangements for cooking the rations on a march 
or in camp, are always more or less annoying to troops. 
Coming into camp perhaps durhig a storm after a long 
day's march, the men have to w^ait for their supper until 
a party has been despatched with a team sometimes sev- 
eral miles to procure fuel, this more frequently green 
wood than dry. After the fuel arrives and a fire is kin- 
dled, it takes a long time before the food is cooked. In 
the meanwhile, wet, weary, and half sick, the men are 
waiting for their supper. If this could be given to them 
at once, and they could go to their tents and rest, how 
much more fitted they would be for duty the next morn, 
ing, and how much smaller would be the sick report. A 
great portion of this discomfort w^ould be obviated by 
the use of a camp stove, a drawing of which is shown in 
plate . Two of these stoves to a company are sufficient. 
All the necessary kettles and utensils accompany it, in- 
cluding gridiron, frying-pan, griddle, and bake-oven. 



ratio:n^S5 and mode of cooking them. 91 

Light and portable, the whole is fitted into a cask which 
secures its transportation without fear of injury. The 
fire is made in a few moments from a few short faggots 
which are placed in the stove when starting on the march 
in the morning after breakfast ; so that, in half an hour 
after coming into camp, the men may all have hot coffee, 
and go to bed. This stove is made in New York, and 
may be procured from the agent. No. 13 Broadway. 



PRESERVED MEATS AND OTHER FOOD. 

The great difficulty of transporting provisions in bulk 
without their becoming damaged by exposure to the wet, 
and therefore unfit for use, causing serious inconvenience, 
and often impeding materially the operations of a cam- 
paign, renders it eminently desirable that such food, as- 
similating to the ration, as can be prepared in a condensed 
form should be procured. Samples of preserved and con- 
densed food have been submitted to careful examination 
and test by competent and reliable officers, and found to 
answer all the purposes for which they are intended, and 
can therefore be safely recommended for campaign use. 



CHAPTER IX. 

FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

Field works are any constructions which have for their 
object to impede the advance of an enemy, or to enable 
an inferior force to maintain their position against the at- 
tack of a superior number. 

The name oi field fortification is applied to a work 
which is composed of an embankment of earth called a 
"parapet," and an excavation called a "ditch," on the 
exterior side, which last furnishes the earth for the em- 
bankment. 

The outline or form of the work varies with the char- 
acter of the ground, the circumstances under which it is 
constructed, the strength of the force, and particular char- 
acter of the defence. The profile or shape of the embank- 
ment or parapet is usually the same in all cases. 

When the ground about a work within effective range 
of the fxre-arms of the attacking party is quite flat, the 
height, called the " command " of the work, must bQ at 
least 7 feet 6 inches, in order that the defenders may be 
covered from the fire of men on horseback — that class of 
troops being able to discharge their arms at 7 feet 6 inches 
above the ground. 

Unimportant works, or such as are situated on higher 
ground than that within effective artillery range, may 
have their parapets as low as 6 feet, or even 5 feet. 



FIELD FOETIFICATIOISrS. 93 

Fig. 1. — Plate 2 shows the ordinary form of the 
profile of an intrenchment, in soils of which the natural 
slope is one perpendicular to one base. 

A B C D E F is the profile of the Parapet. 

G H I J the profile of the Ditch. 

L M N" the profile of the Glacis. 

A B the Banquette Slopes. 

B Tread of the Banquette. 

C D the Interior Slope. 

D E the Superior Slope. 

E F the Exterior Slope. 

F G the Berm. 

G H the Scarp. 

H I the Bottom of the Ditch. 

I J the Counterscarp. 

A the Foot of the Banquette Slope. 

B the Crest of the Banquette. 

C the Foot of the Interior Slope. *** 

D the Interior Crest. 

E the Exterior Crest. 

F the Foot of the Exterior Slope. 

G the Crest of the Scarp. 

H the Foot of the Scarp. 

I the Foot of the Counterscarp. 

J the Crest of the Counterscarp. 

L the Crest of the Glacis. 

M the Foot of the Glacis. 

Fig. 2 shows the general plan of intrenchments with 
flanking arrangements. 

ABC and F G H are the Advanced Parts. 

C D E F are the Retired Parts. 

A B, B C, F G, and G H are the Faces. 

C D and E F are the Flanks. 

D E the Curtain. 

E B and D G the Lines of Defence. 

ABC and F G H are the Salient Angles. 

C D E and D E F the Re-entering Angles. 

C D E and B E F the Angles of Defence. 

b A c and e F g the Sectors without Fire. 

L M and N R the Capitals. 

Sometimes the parapet* is formed of earth taken from 

* In this manner cover for troops may be very quickly obtained, with the 
advantage of having the power to advance over the parapet in order of battle 
when occasion offers. 



91 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

an excavation or trench inside of it ; in this case a parapet 
may be as low as 3 feet, because, then, the defenders 
standing in the trench of equal depth, and close behind 
the parapet, are sufficiently covered by it. 

Should there be ground near the position to be forti- 
fied, higher than that on which the parapet stands, the 
latter must then have a greater command than 7 feet 6 
inches, but in the more simple kind of field works the 
command does not exceed 12 feet ; for as soldiers cannot 
easily throw earth with a shovel to a greater height than 
6 feet, and as other means are generally wanting in the 
field, it is evident that the height of a parapet for such a 
work, must be limited by the capability of executing it 
with shovels and pickaxes by two parties of men, one 
standing on a level 6 feet above the other. The same 
reason determines the greatest depth of ditch to be 12 
feet, a scaffolding being necessary at 6 feet above the bot- 
tom of the ditch to receive the earth which is thrown from 
thence ; the earth is then thrown up to the level of the 
ground, by other laborers placed on the scaffolding. 

In the construction of field works it should always be 
recollected that a great command of parapet not only 
requires additional means, trouble, and time to throw up 
the earth, but also renders necessary an increased mass 
of earth for the banquette, which may thus encumber the 
interior of the work. 

To obviate, as much as possible, the latter evil, it is 
usual to mount the banquette by steps, when the parapet 
has a greater command than 8 feet. 

The thickness of the parapets of field works must be 
regulated by the description of arms likely to be employed 
against them ; in order, therefore, that they may afford a 
reasonable degree of resistance to repeated firing, the 



FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 95 

thickness of parapets must somewhat exceed the penetra- 
tion of the shot which may be used in the attack. 

Penetration of shot. Thickness of parapet. 
Musket ball, 10 to 18 inches. 3 feet. 

6 — pounder, S-J to 4 feet. 6 feet. 

9 — pounder, 6^ to 7 feet. 8 or 9 feet. 

12--pounder, Si to 10 feet. 10 or 12 feet. 

It is found by experiment that loose earth resists the 
penetration of shot just as well as that which has been 
rammed together. 

Although a musket ball penetrates, at most, only 18 
inches into earth, musketry parapets require to be 
made 3 feet thick, in order that they may be sufficiently 
substantial to preserve the requisite height, notwithstand- 
ing the action of the weather. 

Heavier guns than 12-pounders are rarely brought 
into the field, consequently 12 feet may be considered as 
the greatest thickness of a parapet ; and it has been shown 
that, for the simpler works, 12 feet is the greatest com- 
mand of a parapet, and likewise the greatest depth of a 
ditch. 

The exterior side of a parapet is formed with a slope 
which has a base equal to its height, that being the in- 
clination which (ordinary) earth assumes when thrown up 
loosely ; and, therefore, it is the most advantageous form 
for a mass of earth whose sides are unsupported. 

The interior slope of a parapet has a base not greater 
than one-third or one-fourth of its height, in order to allow 
the men to approach near the crest, and to fire over the 
parapet with ease. 

As newly moved earth will not remain at such a steep 
slope without support, it must be retained in that state 
by a revetment. 

The REVETMENT is conimouly made with gabions, fas- 



96 FIELD FOIiTIFlCATIOKS. 

cines, sand-bags, or sods of turf; or again with hurdles, 
casks, trunks of trees, and occasionally with doors, shut- 
ters, &c., from any neighboring houses. Trunks of trees 
are objectionable as a revetment for the interior slope, on 
account of the splinters that fly from them when struck 
by shot ; and large trees, laid horizontally to revet the 
escarp or counterscarp, are defective, because they serve 
as steps for the assailants. 

Gabions are strong cylindrical baskets without top or 
bottom, 2 feet in diameter, and 2 feet 9 inches in height. 
These are placed in rows along the line of work at an 
inclination corresponding to the required slope, and then 
filled with earth. To make a gabion, from eight to four- 
teen pickets, 3 feet 6 inches long, are fixed upright in the 
ground, at equal distances, in the circumference of a circle, 
1 foot 11 inches in diameter ; flexible twigs (or rods) are 
then interwoven with the upright pickets, commencing 
with three rods at the bottom, and weaving each in succes- 
sion outside of two pickets and inside of one ; as the twigs 
(or rods) are expended, others are added, and the basket 
work continued to the height of 2 feet 9 inches ; this work 
(which is called the web) is sewn in three or four parts, 
from top to bottom ; withes, (called gads,) or spun-yarn 
being used for that purpose, in order to keep it from 
coming off the pickets ; the ends of these ar^ then cut off, 
about an inch from the web. A gabion, thus made, stands 
3 feet high in the revetment, and weighs from 36 to 40 lbs. 
The best wood for the web, and particularly for the gads, 
is willow and hazel. 

Fascines are military faggots, 18 feet long and 9 
inches in diameter : they can be sawed into shorter lengths, 
and are sometimes made only 6 feet long. 

To make a fascine, two trestles (like a St. Andrew's 
cross) are fixed in the ground at 16 feet apart; then 



FIELD FOKTIFICATIOJS'S. 97 

three or four other trestles (according to the length and 
thickness of the brushwood) are placed at equal distances 
between the two first trestles, and in a direct line with 
them ; brushwood is next laid along the trestles, (the 
smallest inside,) so as to project 17 or 18 inches beyond 
the extreme trestles, and is compressed to a diameter of 
9 inches by means of an instrument called a choker ;^ the 
brushwood is bound with gads, (before the choker is re- 
laxed,) at 6 inches beyond the extreme trestles, and at in- 
termediate intervals of 15^ inches, and the ends of the 
fascine are sawed off square, at 1 foot beyond the extreme 
trestles. 

Fascine gads are tough and flexible twigs, 5 feet long, 
very much twisted to render them fit for tying. A squad 
of five men can, in an hour, make a fascine which weighs 
(when of tolerably dry material) from 140 to 160 lbs. 
If, however, the brushwood is green, and much thicker 
than a man's thumb, it will weigh 200 lbs. The fascines 
forming a revetment are fastened in their position, (one 
above another.) by pickets 3|- or 4 feet long, which are 
driven obliquely downwards through the fascine so as to 
form an angle of 45° with the slope. The pickets should 
be in the proportion of 6 to an 18-inch fascine, of which 
two are driven vertically, in order to fasten each fascine 
to that which is beneath it. 

Two gabions make nearly the same quantity of revet- 
ment as an 18-inch fascine, and consume but half the 
quantity of materials ; moreover, they require only com- 
mon laborers to form them into a revetment, and stand in 
their positions without pickets or other fastening ; they also 
make a more durable revetment than fascines or sand-bags. 



* The choker consists of 4 feet of chain, with a wooden lever at each end. 
On the chain is marked, by rings, a length of 28 inches, being a circumfer- 
ence equivalent, nearly, to a diameter of 9 inch3s. 
5 



9S FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

As fascines are heavy, requii'e pickets to fasten them, 
and exj)erienced men to build them in revetment; as, 
moreover, each fascine takes twice as much material as 
two gabions, wdiich, together, will make a revetment of 
equal superficies, it is evident that fascines are inferior to 
gabions for the formation of revetments, although they 
support the earth at the same slope, viz., with a base 
equal to one-quarter of its height. 

Sand-bags are bags of coarse canvas, measuring, when 
empty and laid flat, 2 feet 8 inches by 1 foot 4 inches ; 
they contain, when quite full, a bushel of earth; but Vvhen 
tied and placed in revetment, only three-quarters of a 
bushel. In building a revetment with them they are ar- 
ranged with their ends and sides presented alternately to 
the front in each course, and with the joints in the succes- 
sive courses broken, like brickwork. Sixteen sand-bags 
build 10 square feet of revetment ; they ought to be tarred, 
if the revetments are to last a considerable time ; if not 
tarred, they rot in two months. An empty sand-bag 
weighs 1 lb. 2 oz., and when tarred 1 lb. 12 oz. 

Filled sand-bags are musket-shot proof, and are fre- 
quently placed on a parapet, one across two others, the 
latter being a short distance asunder, in order that the in- 
tervals may serve as loopholes. 

Gun batteries are sometimes made entirely of sand- 
bags, which are filled at a distance and brought to the 
place ; this may be done either to save time, or when 
earth cannot be procured on the spot, in consequence of 
the soil being rocky or marshy. 

On naval expeditions sand-bags are very serviceable, 
as there is no other w^ay in which a battery can be prompt^ 
]y formed on a shore. 

When sand-bags or gabions are made use of to revet 
tlic cheeks of embrasures, they should be covered with 



FIELD FOrwTIFICATIOICS. 99 

raw hides, to prevent them from being damaged by the 
flash and the concussion caused by the discharge of the 
gun. 

Sods of turf, being generally procurable on the spot, 
are much used in the revetments of the slopes of field 
works ; but there are strong objections to sod revetments, 
particularly as they take three times as long to build as a 
brick wall. 

Good sods ought to be cut 16 inches long, 8 inches 
wide, and 4 inches thick ; they are built up in the same 
mamier as bricks, and with tlie grass downwards, and are 
fastened with pickets long enough to penetrate three 
courses. Six sods build 2 square feet of revetment. A 
sod revetment requires most labor ; revetments of sand- 
bags, fascines, and gabions, require successively less ; the 
last is the best in all respects ; a sod revetment retains 
the earth at a slope of one-third only, the three others at 
a slope of one-fourth. 

The parapet is bounded on its upper surface by a 
plane called the '* superior slope ; " this declines towards 
the counterscarp, in order to enable the defenders to see 
and fire on the assailants (directly) until they descehd 
into the ditch. The amount of this slope is called the 
" plongee," and this varies from one-sixth to one-fourth 
of the thickness of the parapet, but it must not exceed 
one-fourth in order that the crest '^ of the parapet may not 
become too weak. 

It is of great importance that the superior slope should 
be directed to the counterscarp, as it then enables the 
defenders, notvfith standing the smoke and confusion con- 
sequent on an attack, to direct their fire with certainty to 

* It has been found by experience that a soldier cannot depress his mnsket, 
when firing, more than 15^ below a horizonal plane, and a plongee of one-fourth 
of the thickness of the parapet gives a depression of 150 ; this is an additional 
reason for liinitina: the plon2;?e to one-fourth of the thiokness of the parapet. 



100 FIELD FOKTIFICATIONS. 

a spot where the assailants' columns must be, more or 
less, detained by the ditch and the obstacles in it. 

If the superior slope cannot be directed to the edge of 
the counterscarp without making the plongee more than 
one-fourth of the thickness of the parapet, the counter- 
scarp must be raised by means of a small glacis. The 
crest of this glacis, however, should be kept at least 4 feet 
below the crest of the parapet of the work, that the assail - 
ants, when on the glacis, may not have the power of firing 
into the work. 

The outer edge of the superior slope is called the 
*• exterior crest," whilst the inner (and upper) edge of the 
same slope is called the " interior crest," or the " crest " 
of the parapet. 

A step, called a ** banquette," is placed at the foot of 
the interior slope, and from 4 feet 3 inches to 4 feet 6 
inches below the crest, in order to enable the defenders to 
fire with ease over the parapet, and in the direction of its 
superior slope. 

The terreplein, or tread of the banquette, is made 3 
feet wide for one rank of men, and 4 feet wide if intended 
fot two ranks. In order that the men on it may descend 
backwards with ease, there is a gentle* slope for that 
purpose, having a base equal to twice the height of the 
banquette. 

The ditch is not excavated immediately at the foot of 
the exterior slope of the parapet, but at a distance from it, 
varying from 1 to 4 feet, according to the adhesiveness of 
the soil. This space of unmoved earth is called the berme, 
and it is requisite both to remove the pressure of the par- 
apet from the immediate edge of the ditch, and to facili- 

* If the parapet has a greater command than 8 feet, this convenience is re- 
linquished on account of the great space occupied by it, and the banquette is 
ascended by steps. 



FIELD FOKTIFICATIONS. 101 

tate the construction and repair of the parapet. A berme 
has the defect of affording an intermediate landing-place 
on which the assailants naay form ; and although it may 
be occupied by obstacles, these require additional labor, 
and may be destroyed by cannon ; yet a berme can scarcely 
be dispensed with unless the earth is very adhesive, and 
that the parapet is not more than 8 feet high. 

The berme, in most cases, may be cut away after the 
parapet has had two or three days to settle. 

The ditch will not be an effective obstacle if less than 
6 feet in depth, and for the reason given, it is not made 
deeper than 12 feet. 

The sides of the ditch being of unmoved earth, they 
will support themselves, without revetment, at a steeper 
slope than those of the parapet ; and as the counterscarp 
has not the weight of the parapet to resist, and is not 
exposed to fire, it may, generally, be made steeper than 
the escarp. 

The slopes of both vary from a base equal to the height 
to a base of one quarter of the height. 

To find tlie breadth of the ditch, (of the usual shape,) 
divide the area of a profile of the parapet by the intended * 
depth of the ditch, and the quotient is the mean breadth 
of the latter ; to this, add half the sum of the bases of the 
escarp and counterscarp slopes for the breadth at top, and 
deduct the same half sum for the breadth at bottom. 

The best shape for an unflanked ditch is one having a 
triangular section, as it does not permit the assailants to 
form at the bottom ; and moreover, with an equal depth 
and area of section, it may be made wider at top than a 
trapezoid would be ; by which means the superior slope 
of the parapet can be directed to the counterscarp without 

* This is determined cbieiiy by the nature of the soil and the size of the 
parapet. 



102 FIELD rORTIFICATIONS. 

too much increasing the plong^e, or without raising the 
counterscarp by a glacis. 

To find the breadth of a ditch liaving a triangular sec- 
tion, divide the area of a profile of the parapet by half 
the given depth of ditch, and the quotient is the required 
breadth at top ; the sides may evidently have any given 
inclinations to the horizon consistently with the given 
breadth, depth, and area of a transverse section. 



THE OUTLINES OF FIELD WORKS. 

The direction which a parapet is made to assume in 
order to enclose, or partially enclose, the ground to be 
fortified, is called the outline of a work. 

The following are general principles to be observed in 
determining the outlines of field works : 

1st. There should be a reciprocal defence between all 
the parts of works, so that the ground, over which an 
enemy must pass to the attack should, if possible, be seen 
both in front and in flank. 

2dly. The " lines of defence " must not exceed the 
effective range of muskets, viz., about 160 yards. 

3dly. Re-entering ^ angles (viz., flanking angles) ought 
never to be less than 90° and seldom more than 100° ; 
for, if less than 90°, the men on the flanking parts would 
fire against each other ; and if more than 100°, the fire of 
the flanking parts would diverge too far from the salient 
to be flanked. 

4thly. The salient angles of works should be as obtuse 
as possible, and never less than 60°, otherwise the interior 
space might become too contracted ; the angle would be 
so sharp as to be quickly worn away by the weather, and 

* In both these cases it is presumed that the soldier fires (as he 'generally 
does) at right angles to the parapet behind which he stands. 



Redan, Cremaillere, Line and Star Forts. 




FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 103 

would be easily battered down ; also the * undefended 
sectoral space in front of the salient angle (which is the 
supplement of the angle) would become very great ;- and 

5thly. The outline of a field work should be propor- 
tioned in length to the number of men and guns intended 
for its defence. One man occupies a space of three feet. 

The names of the works most commonly employed in 
field fortification are redans, single, double, and triple ; 
redans with auxiliary fianks ; lunettes, redoubts, star 
forts, bastioned and demi-bastioned forts, block-houses, 
and works used mostly for lines of intrenchment, such as 
tenailles and cremailleres. 

The REDAN is a work consisting of two faces, which 
form with each other a salient angle, the rear being 
open. When the faces are not more than about 20 yards 
in length, the work is sometimes called a fleche. 

The redan is in the most advantageous position when 
the ground before the salient angle, and approaches to the 
gorge, are inaccessible, or when the w^ork can be sup- 
ported by troops ; for example, when, with obstacles in 
its front, it is employed as an advanced work to defend 
hollow ground which cannot be seen from the principal 
work — to protect a bridge, a dam, a road, a defile, or to 
cover a guard, an advanced post, &c. 

The weak points of this work are : that it has an open 
gorge, and that its ditch, and the ground in front of the 
salient angle, are undefended either by direct or flanking 
fire. 

On account of its having an open gorge, it is seldom 
advisable to construct a redan as an isolated work ; its 
rear should be exposed to the fire of some collateral work, 

* Undefended by direct fire. To prevent the enemy from approaching the 
work on these undefended sectors the salients should be directed towards somo 
natural obstacle, such as a marsh, i&c. ; or if this cannot be done, then artificial 
obstacles should be disposed in their front. 



104 FIELD FOKTIFICATIONS. 

or have free communication with a body of troops in its 
rear, to whom it may form an advanced post, or outwork ; 
otherwise the faces should terminate on a river, a marsh, 
or any inaccessible ground, which would prevent it from 
being turned. 

The first defect, viz., that of having an open gorge, 
may be remedied in a slight degree by placing along the 
gorge abatis, trous de loup, &c., (or palisades, if time and 
materials abound ;) as for the second defect, a direct fire 
may be brought in front of the salient either by rounding 
the latter, or by cutting off the angle by a short face not 
less than 6 yards long. 

A flanking fire may be procured for the ditch and sa- 
lients, by forming auxiliary flanks, which may be placed 
either towards the middle or at the extremities of the 
faces ; such a flank ought not to be less than 12 yards 
long, that there may be, at least, 12 men firing from it. 

Double redans consist of two redans joined together, 
their exterior faces being generally longer than the others : 
the French call a work of this kind a queue d' hyronde. 

A TRIPLE REDAiT coiisists of three redans joined to- 
gether, the exterior faces of these are also, in general, 
longer than the others. 

A LUNETTE is a large redan with flanks parallel or 
nearly parallel to the capital ; as a general rule, the flanks 
are traced perpendicularly to the intended line of fire, for 
the purpose of bringing on certain spots a more direct 
fire than could be made from the faces of the work. 

It is often desirable to secure the gorges of these works 
against surprise ; this may be done by disposing across 
the gorge a single or double row of palisades, or a stock- 
ade-work, in the form of a front fortification or of a te- 
naille : there should be a banquette to it, that the defenders 
may have a command over the assailants, and a ditch to 



FIELD rOKTIFICATIO]^S. 105 

prevent the enemy from getting close, and cutting, burn- 
ing, or blowing down the obstacle. Trous de loup, 
abatis, and chevaux-de-frise are sometimes disposed 
across the gorge for the same purpose. 

A REDOUBT is a closed work, the parapet of which does 
not form re-entering angles ; it may be quadrilateral, 
polygonal, or circular. 

Circular redoubts, although they have no undefended 
sectors, and enclose a greater space than any other re- 
doubt with an equal length of parapet, are seldom formed 
on account of the difficulty of their construction, and also 
because their ditches are incapable of any flanking de- 
fence ; the lines of fire diverging from the parapet, any 
one spot on the ground is very imperfectly defended. 

A four-sided figure is the best and most usual form 
for a redoubt, because it is of simple construction ; the 
ditches are more easily flanked, and there are not so 
many points of attack as in a redoubt of a greater num- 
ber of angles. Redoubts, being closed Vv^orks, are better 
calculated to stand detached than redans or lunettes, and 
are, therefore, constructed when a small work is required 
without any immediate protection from the gorge — the 
armed party being strong enough to complete and man a 
four-sided redoubt, each side of which is not less than 15 
yards long. 

The size depends on the number of men who are to 
garrison it, and upon the number of guns which it is to 
contain ; also upon the length of time during which it is 
to be occupied : this may be for a few hours only, (as on 
a field of battle,) or for a period of weeks or months. 

If wanted only for a few hours, it will be sufficient to 
allow 3 feet ill length of parapet for every man of the de- 
tachment ; or for every two men, if they are to be formed 
in double rank. It* guns are to be placed in the work, 15 



lUb FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

feet of parapet must be given to each, in order that the 
gunners may have sufficient room on each side to work it. 

But when the redoubt is destined to contain a body of 
men for a considerable length of time, it becomes neces- 
sary to have room for them to lie down within the ban- 
quette with their arms and packs ; supposing one-third to 
be on guard, patrolling, &c., two square yards, in addi- 
tion to the slope of the banquette, are sufficient for each 
man, and 30 square yards for each gun with its appoint- 
ments. 

The rule, consequently, for a square redoubt is : to 
multiply the given number of men by 2, and the number 
of guns by 36, for the number of square yards which the 
work ought to contain within the foot of its banquette, 
the square root of the product will be the length in yards 
of the side of the square forming that area ; adding to this 
result the breadth of two interior slopes, and of 2 ban- 
quettes with their slopes, (about 7 yards altogether,) we 
shall have the side of the square formed by the crest of 
the parapet. 

A square redoubt ought not to be traced with less 
extent of side than 15 yards ; for, by employing the cal- 
culation explained above, it will be found that such a 
w^ork is only just sufficient to contain the men necessary 
for its defence : on the other hand, it is unusual to make 
a square redoubt with a longer side than 40 yards, because 
it would require a garrison more suitable to a work of a 
stronger outline. 

The imperfections of redoubts are, that they are en- 
tirely without a flanking fire for the defence of the ground 
in front of their faces, also that their ditches and the sec- 
toral spaces before the angles are without *any fire what- 
ever for their defence. 

A flanking defence for the ditches may be obtained by 



FIELD FORTIFICATIOIsrS. 107 

placing palisade or stockade caponnieres in them, either 
at the angles or in the middle of the faces ; by tambours 
in a like position, or by loop-holed galleries under the 
counterscarp at the salients of the work. 

The want of a fire in the directions of the capitals may 
be remedied, as in the redan, by cutting off an angle by 
a short face, by making it curved, or by tracing a portion 
of the line of parapet en cremaillere ; viz., by disposing it 
in a succession of salient and re-entering angles, the sides 
of which are alternately parallel to the capital : this con- 
struction is, however, very difficult, and causes inconven- 
ient variations in the thickness and height of the parapet. 

A ditch caponniere is an oblong structure formed with 
palisades, or with stockade work, loopholed, and roofed 
over with planks and earth to secure the men from the 
effects of shells, and a plunging fire from the counterscarp. 
It ought, if possible, to be flanked with musketry, to pre- 
vent an enemy from closing on it, and getting under 
cover. 

The best position for a caponniere in the ditch of a re- 
doubt is at the salient angle, as then one caponniere flanks 
two branches of the ditch. It should be separated from 
the counterscarp by an enlargement of the ditch, to pre- 
vent an enemy from using it as a bridge to cross the 
ditch, and it ought to have a wicket to allow of sallies 
into the ditch. 

The bottom or sole of the caponniere may, sometimes 
with advantage, be sunk 3 or 4 feet below the bottom of 
the ditch, in order that the fire from the loopholes may 
graze along it, and prevent an enemy from closing on 
them ; by this construction, and by making the roof con- 
vex, it becomes more difficult for him to use the capon- 
niere as a bridge to pass the ditch. 

To lessen the destructive effect of shells, traverses 



108 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

should be placed in all closed works when those missiles 
are likely to be employed against them. 

From the interior to the exterior of closed works 
there must be a passage through the parapet, protected 
by a traverse or by stockade work, and the traverse 
should extend far enough on each side of the passage to 
intercept shot which might enter it obliquely. The ditch 
is crossed by a bridge which is conveniently formed of 
loose planks and beams, because, in case of attack, they 
can be quickly taken up and used to barricade the passage. 
When the ditch is more than tvrelve feet wide, a trestle 
must be placed in the middle to support the beams or 
sleepers. 

When rough timber only can be procured, stout 
straight limbs of trees must be selected for the sleepers, 
which may be covered with strong hurdles, (or brush- 
wood,) over which a layer of sods and then a small quan- 
tity of gravel may be laid. 

A STAR FORT is a closed work, the parapet of which 
forms several acute salient angles and obtuse re-entering 
angles, giving it a form like the usual representation of a 
star. 

It has been seen that redoubts are defended only by 
direct fire, and that without some contrivance for affording 
flanking fire, the sectors at the salients, as well as the 
ditches, are absolutely undefended. Star forts, consisting 
of re-entering as well as salient angles, are intended to 
obviate that defect in some degree. They may be con- 
structed either upon an exterior or interior polygon. If 
ground is to be fortified which does not admit the possi- 
bility of working outwards, as an island h instance, a 
polygon is traced to suit the form of the ground ; the 
sides of the polygon are bisected by perpendiculars drawn 
inwards, and the faces of the star fort are drawn from the 



FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 109 

angles of the polygon to the inner extremities of the per- 
pendiculars : this is called fortifying upon the exterior 
polygon. 

The length of the perpendicular * in a square, penta- 
gon, hexagon, and octagon, should be respectively one- 
eighth, one-fifth, one- fourth, and one-third of the side, in 
order that the flanking angles may approach as near as 
possible to right angles, without making the salient angles 
less than 60°. When the polygon is irregular, the length 
of the perpendiculars must be determined by the angles 
nearest to them. 

Again, it may be required to surround a building 
with a star fort in such a position that the work could 
not be traced inwards ; then, a polygon surrounding the 
building must be laid down, and on each of its sides an 
equilateral triangle must be formed towards the exterior. 

If this construction be applied to a dodecagon, it will 
be found that the re-entering angles are exactly right an- 
gles ; in an octagonal fort the re-entering or flanking angles 
are each equal to 105^. 

The necessity for employing a polygon superior to an 
octagon will rarely occur ; yet with irregular figures it 
may happen that some of the angles are equal, or nearly 
so, to those of regular polygons of more than twelve 
sides. 

It is necessary to fix some limit as a minimum to the 
length of face for these works ; this depends on the dis- 
tance at which a shot fired from the parapet of a face 
would reach the level of the ground ; for it is evident 
that if the face be made less than that distance, the enemy, 
arrived at the rounding of the counterscarp, will be more 
or less secure from the fire of the adjoining face. If we 

* The lengths given are merely approximations in the form of the nearest 
simple fraction of the side. 



110 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

suppose a man to fire along the superior slope of a para- 
pet with a plongee of one-sixth, and that the work has a 
command of seven and a half feet, we have by similar 
triangles, 

1 : 6 : : 7^ (the command) : 45 ; 

the distance, in feet, at which the shot would reach the 
level of the ground. 

The face should, therefore, not be less than 45 feet, 
viz., 15 yards. If the bottom of the ditch on any face is 
to be defended by the fire of the next face, a still greater 
length is required : to find this, we have the proportion 
1:6:: the relief (the height of the crest of the parapet 
above the bottom of the ditch) : the distance at which a 
shot would reach the bottom of the ditch ; this distance 
is 30 yards when the command of the work and depth of 
its ditch are both seven and a half feet. The length of 
the faces depends also upon the number of guns to be 
placed behind the parapet, and upon the strength of the 
garrison ; but 35 yards may be considered as the great- 
est length of face, for the troops required to defend a star 
fort having a longer face would be sufficient to construct 
and defend a fort of a better tracing. 

The construction of star forts is attended with some 
trouble, particularly if the ground is uneven : such works 
present at their acute salient angles numerous pbints of 
attack : the faces and salients are without flanking defence 
when the polygon is inferior to an octagon, and even in 
this case such defence is imperfect : the ditches are unde- 
fended, unless the faces are made unreasonably long ; the 
line of parapet to be manned is very great, when compared 
with the interior space, and is exposed to be enfiladed in 
all directions. 



FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. IH 



CONSTRUCTIONS. 

The following are convenient methods of tracing on 
the ground the most useful polygonal redoubts and star 
forts : 

For a pentagonal redoubt : on a base equal to one-fifth 
of the perimeter, or length of the parapet, form an iso?t 
celes triangle, of which each of the equal sides is one- 
third of the perimeter, and on each side of this triangle as 
a base form another isosceles triangle with its (equal) 
sides, each equal to the side of the pentagon, or first base. 

For a hexagonal redoubt : trace an equilateral triangle, 
the side of which is in length three times that of the re- 
doubt; trisect each side, and join the nearest outer ex- 
tremities of the centre portions : these lines, with those 
which join their extremities, will constitute the hexagonal 
redoubt required. 

For a hexagonal star fort : trace an equilateral triangle 
on a base equal to one-fourth of the whole length of the 
parapet ; trisect each side, and form equilateral triangles 
on the three centre portions. These will complete the 
figure. 

For an octagonal redoubt : trace a square on a side 
equal to three-tenths of the whole length of parapet of the 
redoubt ; and from the angles of the square measure on 
each side half the diagonal ; the points being joined, the 
magistral line is traced. 

For an octagonal star fort : trace a square on a base 
equal to three-twentieths of the whole length of the parapet 
of the star fort ; with this square form an octagon as before, 
and on each of its sides trace an equilateral triangle. 

Forts with bastions are the most perfect of closed 
field works, as it is evident that they possess all the ad- 



112 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

vantages of mutual defence afforded by the corresponding 
works in permanent fortifications ; they are traced simi- 
larly to these last, although rarely on a polygon superior 
to a pentagon ; as, however, their defence mainly depends 
on the fire of common muskets, their lines of defence must 
not exceed the effective range of such arms, or about 160 
yards, and therefore the side of the polygon on which 
they are constructed must not exceed 200 yards in length. 

On the other hand, the side of the polygon should not 
be less than 120 yards in length ; since, if it were so, the 
bastions would be too small, and the flanks and curtain 
too short for the defence required from them. 

Bastioned forts should have within them a good re^ 
duit, in order to give confidence to the garrison, and secure 
its retreat : such a reduit should have a command of four 
or five feet over every part of the main work, in order 
that the enemy, having gained the parapet of the latter, 
may not fire from thence into the reduit. 

The reduit may either conform to the outline of the 
fort, or it may be a simple redoubt, a blockhouse, or a 
tower of brick or stone, so traced that the defenders may 
fire into the bastions of the fort, these being the points at 
which an enemy is most likely to force an entrance. 

As bastioned forts require a strong garrison, they are 
constructed when it is intended to occupy a point of im- 
portance for a considerable time, and, therefore, the reduit 
often forms, at the same time, the barrack of the garrison. 

In order to throw an additional fire towards the direc- 
tion of the salients, the curtain is sometimes broken in 
the prolongation of the lines of defence ; but in order that 
some fire may be directed immediately in front, a portion 
may be formed in a line parallel to the original curtain, 
and equal to about one-third of its length ; the two bri- 
sures should form with «each other a re-entering rather 



FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 113 

than a salient angle, in order that there may be no dead 
spaces in the ditch. 

The counterscarp of the ditch may be drawn either to 
the shoulder angles of the bastions, as in permanent forti- 
fication, or parallel to the faces, flanks, and curtain ; the 
latter method is generally preferable, as it saves time and 
labor ; in this case, however, the counterscarp of one flank 
would conceal the ditch of the nearest face from the fire 
of the opposite flank ; this counterscarp ought, therefore, 
in part, to be cut away in an inclined plane, or ramp, 
parallel to, or coinciding with, the line of fire from that 
flank. 

Deme-bastioned forts, like those with bastions, are 
traced by letting fall a perpendicular from the middle of 
each exterior side, and drawing lines of defence ; but each 
front has only one flank, every alternate face extending 
from the angle of the polygon to the inner extremity of 
that flank, and coinciding with the line of defence through- 
out its entire length ; such works have the defect of af- 
fording a regular flanking defence only to every alternate 
face ; as the short face of each front receives a very oblique 
and imperfect flanking defence from the collateral long 
face. 

Loopholes are narrow rectangular openings made in 
walls of masonry or wood, through which to direct a fire 
of musketry. In walls of two feet or two and a half feet 
thick they are about nine inches high by fifteen inches 
wide on the inside, and twenty inches high by four inches 
wide on the outside. In timber six or eight inches thick 
they are eight inches wide inside and three inches outside, 
the height being twelve inches. 

They are made wider on the inside than on the out- 
side, because, thus formed, they aflford better cover for 
the men behind them ; they are placed at not less than 



114 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

three feet asunder, that the wall may not be too much 
weakened, and that the men firing through them may not 
be crowded ; they are made from four feet to four and a 
quarter feet above the banquette or ground on which the 
men stand to fire through them. 

Stockade work is a wall composed of trunks of trees, 
or rough pieces of timber placed upright in the ground ; 
they are made to touch each other, and loopholes are cut 
through them ; if composed of trees, they ought to be 
squared, that the parts in contact may be of the same 
thickness as the rest of the wall. 

A TAMBOUR is an enclosure of palisades or stockade 
work, sometimes with a ditch and banquette, and of any 
form that ma}^ be necessary to afford the defence re- 
quired. 

Blockhouses are covered field works, generally rec- 
tangular ; the walls are formed of trunks of trees, and 
above the timbers of the roof there is, usually, a bed of 
earth, three or four feet thick. 

In mountainous and well- wooded countries blockhouses 
are the best description of field works, because the enemy 
cannot easily bring cannon to destroy them. It is very 
difficult in mountainous countries to find ground where 
works may be constructed free from the defect of being 
commanded, and consequently open works are there com- 
paratively useless. 

Blockhouses are of great advantage as reduits in situ- 
ations where it is difficult to defilade the interiors of works 
from commanding heights, more especially since they may 
serve as barracks for the troops ; in such a case the bed- 
steads, arranged on each side, are used as banquettes, and 
the loopholes are made four feet above them. 

A blockhouse to resist musketry should be composed 
of trees, squared so that the parts in contact may be at 



FIELD FOKTEFICATIONS. 115 

least six inches thick, that being the depth to which a mus- 
ket ball will penetrate in fir. In order to resist artillery, 
two rows of trees (or of stockades) are placed vertically in 
the ground, with an interval between them from three to 
six feet wide, which is filled with earth well rammed. The 
trees or logs should be eleven or twelve feet long, so that 
they may be planted at least three feet in the ground, and 
allow the interior of the blockhouse to be eight or nine 
feet high ; it should also be from eighteen to twenty-four 
feet wide in the interior. 

The earth used to render the covering shell-proof may 
be shaped like a small parapet, and from this an additional 
fire (of musketry) may be obtained ; the access to this upper 
parapet is through a trap-door in the roof. To prevent the 
blockhouse from being set on fire, a ditch should be dug 
round it, leaving a berme of eight or ten feet, and on this 
the earth is piled up against the wood as high as the loop- 
holes. 

Sometimes blockhouses are constructed in the form of 
a cross, when the flanking fire thus obtained on their faces 
renders them much more powerful ; they are also, occa- 
sionally, built with an upper story, the angles of which 
should project over the sides of the lower story ; the foot 
of the lower walls may thus be defended by the fire from 
above. 

An ordinary dwelling-house, with thick masonry walls, 
may be formed into a blockhouse by pulling down the 
upper stories, and heaping a mass of the materials, three 
or four feet in thickness, over the ceiling of the lower 
rooms ; earth or rubbish should also be placed about the 
house as high as the loopholes. 



116 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 



DEFILADINa OF FIELD WORKS. 

To DEFILADE a work from a height is so to regulate the 
direction and elevation of the parapets or covering masses, 
that its interior may be screened from the vievr of an 
enemy on the heights. 

A PLANE OF SIGHT is an imaginary plane supposed to 
pass through the summit of the height from which the 
work is to be defiladed, and the terreplein of the work. 

A PLANE OF DEFILADE is a plaiic supposed to pass 
through the crest of the parapet of the work parallel 
to the plane of sight. 

In many situations it is practicable (and then it is the 
easier method) to defilade the faces or longest branches 
of a work by the tracing ; viz., by directing them on 
marshes, rivers, lakes, precipices, hollows, &c., where 
batteries cannot be erected, or at worst, on points of the 
height not nearer than 800 ^ yards to the work. Also the 
choice of the outline of the work should be attended to ; 
for among the different tracings by which the same object 
may be attained, some will be more easy to defilade than 
others. 

When a work is thrown up in front of a height, it 
is the more difficult to defilade in proportion to its depth ; 
it should, therefore, have an oblong form, and its longest 
faces should be traced parallel to the height. If, for in^ 
stance, the work were a rectangular redoubt, the long 
faces should be traced parallel to the height, and the short 
ones be directed on it. 

An open work will be defiladed when the plane of de- 

* Artillery on a height, even of 120 feet, at 800 yards distance from a work, 
has no more advantage, in respect of a plunging fire, than if it were on a level 
with the rock; for in both cases it must be elevated about IV4 degree to attain 
this range. 



FIELD FOETIFICATIONS. 117 

filement passes through a line 8 feet above the ground at 
its gorge, and at a point 4 or 8 * feet above the command- 
ing hill, according as the work is to be defiladed against 
artillery or musketry. 

It is usual to defilade a work against musketry if there 
are heights within 300 yards of it, and against artillery, 
when the"" heights are not farther distant than 800 yards. 

When the commanding ground is not occupied by the 
enemy, the work may be defiladed in the following man- 
ner : stretch a rope between two poles planted in the line 
of the gorge at 8 feet above the ground ; direct visual 
rays from various points of this rope to the top of a pole 
placed on the commanding hill, and 4 feet high if the 
work is to be defiladed against artillery, but 8 feet if it is 
to be defiladed against musketry ; the intersection of the 
rays with poles planted on the tracing of the intended 
parapet, will indicate the height to which the parapet 
must be raised in order that its defenders may be situated 
under the plane of defilade ; and since these visual rays 
represent lines of fire from the enemy's position on the 
hill, it will be evident that a parapet whose height is thus 
determined will defilade the interior of the work. 

When it is impossible to place the pole on the com- 
manding ground, the following method must be adopted : 
along the gorge of the intended work stretch a rope, which 
is to be 4 feet above the ground if the work is to be de- 
filaded against artillery, and 1 J feet if against musketry ; 
in rear of this rope at any convenient distance (about 5 
yards) drive two pickets into tlie ground, and upon them 
raise or lower a cord or a straight edge of wood, until it 
is in the same plane with the rope at the gorge, and the 

* A field-gun stands about SVa feet above the ground, and a man on horse- 
back can fire about T^/g feet above the ground ; therefore 4 and 8 are taken as 
the nearest whole numbers to these commands respectively. 



118 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

top of the height from which the work is to be defiladed ; 
then look from the rear cord or straight edge along that 
at the gorge, and observe where the line of sight from 
thence cuts the poles raised on the tracing of the intended 
parapet ; these points of section (indicating the position 
of the plane of sight) may be marked by one of the party ; 
lastly, make the crest of the parapet 4 feet higtier than 
the points thus found if the work is to be defiladed against 
cannon, but 6|- feet higher if against musketry. 

If it is found that, by this process, the parapet must 
have more than 12 feet command in order to defilade the 
work ; the parapet must be raised to any convenient 
height, (suppose 10 or 12 feet,) and then, in order to defi- 
lade the part which is not protected by the parapet, a 
traverse must be erected, or the terreplein of the unpro- 
tected part must be lowered, or both of these steps must 
be taken conjointly. 

In defilading a tete de pont, the plane of defilade should 
pass 8 feet above that part of the bridge which is most 
remote from the height. 

To defilade a closed work, (or one with a parapet both 
on the side nearest to and on the side furthest from the 
height,) unless the crests on both those sides are in a 
plane passing 8 feet above the ground which the enemy 
may occupy, in front and in rear, a parados to cover the 
defenders on the banquette of the side nearest to the 
height from reverse fire, is indispensable ; for it is clear 
that the higher the parapet nearest to a commanding 
ground is raised in order to defilade a portion of the whole 
of the interior of the work, the more will the defenders 
standing on the banquette of that parapet be elevated above 
the plane of defilement of the parapet furthest from the 
height, (or the lower one ;) they will, consequently, be- 



FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 119 

come exposed to a reverse fire directed over the lower 
parapet. 

In this case, therefore, make the parapet nearest to 
(he commanding ground as high as convenient, and so as 
to defilade a portion (suppose one-half) of the interior : 
at the extremity of this defiladed portion, and (about) 
parallel to the parapet, raise a parados high enough to in- 
tercept visual rays directed from points 8 feet above the 
banquette of the lower parapet to 4 or 8 feet above the 
height, and from points 8 feet above the banquette of the 
higher parapet to points 8 feet above the ground in front 
of the former parapet. 

If the site of the intended redoubt be commanded on 
opposite sides, the work will be defiladed in the manner 
just described, excepting that, in this case, both the par- 
apets being commanded, each must be raised high enough 
to cover the portion of the work between it and the trav- 
erse or parados from the opposite height. 

Or the work may be defiladed thus : the magistral 
line having been traced, let the engineer place himself at 
any convenient part of the interior with his eye 8 feet from 
the ground, and let a man hold up a measuring rod on the 
tracing line between the engineer and each hill ; then a 
visual ray, from a point estimated to be 8 feet above each 
hill, will intersect the measuring rods in points through 
which the crests of the parapets should pass. The place 
of the engineer is the place of the traverse or parados, the 
height of which is determined, as before, by visual rays 
crossing each other from points 4 or 8 feet above the op- 
posite heights to points 8 feet above the banquettes most 
distant from the heights. 

With the aid of a plane table, the plane of site may 
be readily determined thus : let the upper surface of the 
table (which should be near the surface of the ground in 



120 FIELD FOKTIFICATIONS. 

rear of the work) be placed in a plane touching the points 
of command : the intersections of that surface prolonged, 
with the poles planted at the angles of the work, will de- 
termine as many points in the plane of site. 



PROFILING. 

The proper height of parapet for the work having been 
determined, (by the process of defilading, if necessary,) 
the next step is to plant pickets on the faces, flanks, and 
angles as guides to the workmen in giving it the suitable 
dimensions and form. Thus, to the magistral line of each 
face and flank, trace on the ground perpendicularly at in- 
tervals, and on these measure, horizontally, the bases of 
the slopes composing the profile to be employed. At the 
points thus set out ^ fix poles or laths perpendicularly in 
the ground, and saw ofiT their tops at the height which the 
parapet is to have at that particular part ; nail laths to the 
tops of these poles from. one to the other across the direc- 
tion of the intended parapet ; and thus there will be ob- 
tained an outline of the slopes, or a profile of the parapet. 

For the profile at an angle, lay a rope on the ground 
bisecting that angle, and produce it outwards ; drive pick- 
ets along this rope at the points where it is intersected by 
the prolongations of lines joining the bases of the profiles 
already set up perpendicularly to the adjoining faces ; 
these pickets mark the bases of the profiles at the salient ; 
the laths may then be set up as before. 

When the salient angle is 60°, the breadth of the base 
of any slope measured on the capital will be equal to twice 
the breadth of the same slope taken on a line at right 
angles to the face. 

* The best method of fixing the perpendicular laths is to drive strong 
pickets into the ground at the required points, and to nail to them the laths^ 
previously cut of the proper length. 



FIELD FORTIFICATIONS* 121 



DISTRIBUTION OF THE WORKING PARTY. 

Divide the men. into 6 equal parts, 3 of which are to 
be provided with pickaxes and shovels, 2 are to have 
shovels only, and the remainder are to be furnished with 
rammers only. 

The party is then to be marched to the ground, and 
the men, having both pickaxes and shovels, (viz. the dig- 
gers,) are to be stationed 6* feet apart on the ground 
where the ditch is to be dug along the berme line, and 
facing the work. 

The excavation of the ditch is now begun, the men 
first loosening the earth with their pickaxes, and then 
shovelling it to the place where the parapet is to stand ; 
here the rest of the party are posted, and as the earth is 
thrown up to them, the men with shovels spread it in 
layers, while the remainder with their rammers, beat it 
down to a firm mass ; and as the parapet is raised they 
give it the form indicated by the profiles. 

The profiles may be made of 3 inch plank, ripped up 
into laths three-quarters of an inch thick. 

The work may be drained, if requisite, with fascines 
of stout rods, or with loose stones having brushwood or 
heather laid over them ; these are placed in trenches dug 
across the ground on which the parapet is to be raised. 

In excavating ditches and trenches, the slopes are 
made after the ditch or trench is finished, the sides being 
at first left in steps ; the crest of the slope is marked out, 
and then small sections are cut, here and there, according 
to the proper form of the finished profile : finally, the in- 

* The diggers must not be placed nearer to each other than 4^ feet ; but 
if the party is strong, another row of diggers may be employed at the counter- 
scarp, with their backs to the work ; these throw the earth towards the middle 
of the space marked out for the breadth of the ditch. 

6 



122 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

termediate earth is cut away between these sniall sec- 
tions ; the latter answering the purpose of ensuring regu- 
larity in the excavation of the ditch, as the lath profiles 
ensure it in the erection of the parapet. 

When near the surface, in soil requiring but little 
the use of the pickaxe, an excavation of 6 cubic yards in 
a day of 8 hours would be a fair task for a soldier, who, 
in general, is little accustomed to the use of the pickaxe 
and shovel. 

In calculating the time required to throw up a field 
work, the following data may be assumed ; in light, dry, 
sandy soil, that can be easily dug without the aid of a 
pickaxe, a man can, in a day of 8 hours, load from 19 to 
20 cubic yards of earth on barrows. If a pickaxe be re- 
quired, two men can do the same quantity of work. 

If the whole mass must be first moved with the pick- 
axe, three or four men should be allowed. 

A man can wheel 20 cubic yards of earth per day to 
a distance of 30 yards on level ground, or 20 yards on a 
ramp. 

Twenty cubic yards of earth will fill 500 wheelbar- 
rows. 

A horse can do as much work as 7 men : he can carry 
300 lbs. 20 miles per day, or 200 lbs. 30 miles ; he can 
draw 1,600 lbs. on a plain, and from 1,200 to 1,300 lbs. 
on irregular ground, when the roads are in good order. 

OBSTACLES. 

Palisades are triangular prisms of wood pointed at 
the upper end, and placed upright in the ground at 3 or 
4 inches asunder ; they are about 10 feet long, with faces 
6 or 8 inches wide, and are sunk 3 or 4 feet in the ground. 
A trench of that depth is dug, the palisades are placed in 



FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 123 

it, and the earth is well rammed about them ; they are 
connected at top (and sometimes at bottom also) by a 
ribbon of wood, called a lintel, 4 inches wide by 2J thick, 
nailed to the inside of the palisades about one foot from 
the points ; they ought to stand, at least, 7 feet out of the 
ground. Rough palisades may be formed, quickly, from 
trees by cutting them into lengths about 10 feet, then 
describing triangles, with sides of not less than 6 inches 
in length on the ends, and sawing them lengthwise through 
those sides ; if the trees are 12 or 14 inches in diameter, 
six equilateral triangles meeting in the centre, can be 
described on the ends, and six palisades made of one 
piece ; if the tree is but 6 inches in diameter, then, by 
sawing it in halves, two palisades can be made of one 
piece. 

Palisades are only used in the ditches, and to close 
the gorges of field works, and are not, as in permanent 
works, placed on the banquettes ; when in the ditch, their 
best position is at the foot of the counterscarp, and slightly 
inclined towards it ; for, thus placed, they are more se- 
cure from a direct fire of artillery, and they detain the 
enemy at the counterscarp under the deadly aim of the 
garrison ; also it makes it difficult for the assailants to cut 
them down, there being no room between them and the 
counterscarp to stand and wield the axe. 

Fraises are palisades about 11 feet long, placed in a 
horizontal or in an inclined position ; they ought to be 
sunk about 5 feet in the ground, the buried ends being 
joined by a ribbon in order to render it difficult to pull 
them out ; the pointed ends ought to be not less than 7 
feet from the bottom of the ditch ; and when placed on 
the berme they ought to incline downwards, in order that 
they may not interrupt the passage of shells when rolled 
over the parapet. Fraises are most advantageously placed 



124 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

2 or 3 feet below the edge of the counterscarp, as they 
are, there, more secure than on the berme, from the direct 
fire of the enemy, whom they detain under a close fire 
from the work. 

ChevauX'de-frise are beams of wood from 6 to 10 feet 
long, which are cut in a square or hexagonal form, and 
have pointed stakes or sword blades inserted into the 
faces ; when several are used, in one length, they are 
chained together to prevent the enemy from removing 
them ; and they are made of the lengths just mentioned 
in order that they may be portable. 

They are employed as temporary barriers to impede 
the passage of a breach, the entrance into a work, to block 
up a street, &c. ; they are occasionally placed at the foot 
of the counterscarp of the ditch, and, also, on the berme ; 
in the latter situation they must be covered from the 
view and fire of the enemy by a small glacis. 

Abatis are large boughs or entire trees laid down in 
a line, with the butt ends buried 3 or 4 feet in the ground, 
and the branches turned towards the enemy : to form an 
efficient obstacle, the branches ought to stand, at least, as 
high as a man's breast, the smaller parts being cut off, 
and the larger pointed ; the butts should be secured in the 
ground by beams or trees picketed across them, and they 
should be covered with earth well rammed ; this pre- 
caution will make it difficult to drag them away. They 
ought, moreover, to be covered by a glacis, that they may 
not be seen and breached or destroyed at a distance, by 
artillery. 

A detachment of 90 men can make about 750 feet of 
abatis in a day. 

Some of the trees on the borders of a wood being 
formed into abatis, may deter an enemy from attempting 
to penetrate into the wood. A breastwork may be made 



FIELD FORTiriCATIONS. 125 

of trunks of trees piled one on another to the required 
height behind the abatis ; this is soon done, and it much 
increases the strength of the obstacle. 

Trous de hup are holes dug in the ground in the form 
of an inverted cone or pyramid, and are made about 6 
feet wide and 6 deep : a pointed stake is planted at the 
bottom to prevent an enemy from making use of them as 
rifle pits. In order to form an effective obstacle, they 
should be disposed checker-wise in three rows, with in- 
tervals of about 10 feet between them ; the earth from 
them should be formed into a glacis, rather than heaped 
up betAveen them, as in the latter case they might be easily 
filled up. 

Trous de loup of even two or three feet deep, may be 
usefully employed in rendering impassable shallow wet 
ditches, inundations, and fords ; and, as well as abatis, 
they are suitable obstacles to the advance of an enemy on 
the salients of works, on the weak points of lines, or 
through their intervals ; they may thus compel the en- 
emy to attack the stronger parts. 

The gorges of works may also be closed by abatis and 
trous de loup, when there are no means of planting pali- 
sades for that purpose. 

A man can make one trou de loup in a day. 

An Entanglement is formed by cutting half through 
the stems of small trees, and pulling the upper parts to 
the ground, to which they are then picketed. 

Crows feet are four iron spikes joined together at one 
end in such a manner, that when thrown on the ground 
one point will always be uppermost ; they may be quickly 
made by inserting four spikeiiails into a small block of 
wood, so as to point in different directions ; they are 
chiefly employed to obstruct the advance of cavalry. 

Pointed Stakes are frequently fixed in the ground, at 



126 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

any place which the enemy might occupy at the time of 
an assault ; as on the bermes of works, the edges of trous 
de loup, and in the spaces between them. They must be 
firmly planted in the ground, and if they are pointed be- 
fore insertion, two mallets must be used, one of which is 
provided with a conical hole to receive the point of the 
stake, while the blows are struck with the other ; these 
pickets may be conveniently formed of the small branches 
cut from the trees intended for abatis. 

Common Fougasses are small mines placed in shafts 
or pits from 3 to 10 feet deep. 

The powder is lodged on one side of the shaft at the 
bottom, and is fired from a secure spot by means of a 
powder hose, or fuze, which is brought up one side 
of the shaft, and carried in a trough (or casing tube) 
parallel to the surface of the ground ; the trough should 
be 5 or 6 feet below the ground if there is any danger of 
shells falling on it ; if not, 2 feet will be deep enough. 

A shell fougass is formed by dividing a box into two 
parts by a horizontal partition ; the shells being loaded, 
are placed in the upper part, with the fuzes pointing down 
through holes in the partition, in order that they may be 
ignited, at the same moment, by the priming ; the latter 
consists of a few pounds of powder placed in the lower 
compartment. 

Shell fougasses are very convenient obstacles to im- 
pede the passage of a ditch and the ascent of a breach, as 
they can be prepared within the work, and speedily buried 
at the required spot just before their action is required. 

A stone fougass or rock mortar is thus formed. Ex- 
cavate a shaft at an inclination of about 45° to the horizon, 
and about 6 feet deep ; at the bottom place a charge of 
55 lbs. of powder, then a strong shield of wood (at least 
6 inches thick) in front of the charge ; and over the shield 



FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 127 

throw in 3 or 4 cubic yards of pebbles of not less than 
half a pound weight each ; a sufficient body of earth must 
be heaped vertically above the charge, and retained over 
the upper part of the shaft (near the edge) by a revetment 
of sods, to ensure its effect taking place in the direction 
required. 

Twelve men can make a stone fougass in three hours, 
which, being charged as before described, will, when ex- 
ploded, disperse the materials over a circle of 30 or 40 
yards radius, at about .60 yards from the mouth of the 
shaft. 

The usual and most effective position for fougasses is 
beyond the ditch and over the salients or other weak 
points of the work ; they must be removed in advance of 
the ditch so far as not to injure the counterscarp by their 
explosion. 

A good method of discharging fougasses at the mo- 
ment required, is to place a loaded musket with the muz- 
zle in the priming and a wire attached to the trigger ; the 
wire can be led in any direction, in the same manner as 
the hose, and being pulled at the proper moment, the ex- 
plosion will take place. 

INUNDATIONS. 

It frequently occurs in the field that small streams or 
rivulets are met with, which of themselves offer no im- 
pediment to the advance of an enemy, but which, by ju- 
dicious management, may be made effectually to check 
his attack on certain points where the water may be col- 
lected. 

An inundation, or collection of water, is produced by 
forming across a stream one or more dams, which must 
extend to a certain distance from thence, according to the 



128 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

inclination (or slope) of the ground contiguous to the 
stream, and to the required breadth of the inundation. 

A dam may be formed in the following manner : after 
constructing an embankment of earth on each side of the 
stream perpendicularly to its length, as far as the bank, 
stones and gravel should be thrown into the water to di- 
minish its depth ; then two heaps of earth are prepared, 
one on each bank, and as many workmen being set on as 
can be employed without impeding each other, the earth 
from those heaps is thrown into the. stream over the stones 
and gravel as rapidly as possible, until the embankments 
previously formed are connected together across the 
stream. 

It rarely occurs that sufficient means are to be found 
in the field to allow of a dam being made more than ten 
feet high ; and supposing this height to be given, the dif- 
ference of level between any two dams should be five feet^ 
in order that the shallowest part of the inundation may 
be five feet deep, and, therefore, not fordable. 

The distance at which the dams should be placed frow^ 
one another will depend upon the fall of the bed of the 
stream, and must be determined by levelling. The thick- 
ness of the dam at top may be made equal to the 
depth of the w^ater intended to be retained, but if it is> 
liable to be battered by artillery, it should be ten feet 
thick at top. The exterior slope of the dam may be left 
at the natural slope of the earth, while to that opposed to 
the stream a base of not less than double its height should 
be given. 

A sluice or waste weir should be provided at the 
height to which it is desired the water should rise ; other- 
wise, the water being allowed to flow over every part, 
the dam would be destroyed. These openings, or waste 
weirs, must be revetted with fascines or timber, and ought 



FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 129 

to be completed before the dam is carried up to its full 
height. 

Sometimes the inclination of the ground contiguous to 
the stream prevents the inundation from attaining a depth 
greater than two or three feet ; it may, notwithstanding, 
be rendered impassable, by digging pits and ditches in 
different parts before the water is allowed to cover the 
ground. 

The end of the dam on the enemy's side must be pro- 
tected by field works to prevent him from destroying it, 
or using it as a bridge. When no work can be placed 
immediately to cover the head of the dam, the approaches 
to it should be defended ; or if the opposite bank be within 
short musket range, the end of the dam may be covered 
by abatis. The works thrown up to cover the head of a 
dam are traced precisely on the same principles as those 
which are to protect a bridge. The best condition, there- 
fore, when a choice is possible, is, that the inundations 
should be concave to the enemy. 

Small islands may exist in the midst of an inundation, 
and on these batteries or breastworks for musketry may 
be advantageously formed, either to protect the dams, or 
for the general defence of the position. 



TETES DE PONT. 

Tetes de pont are works thrown up to cover a com- 
munication across a river, to hinder the destruction of the 
bridge, and to defend it until an army or detachment has 
crossed over it. 

They should be of sufficient strength to be defended 

until the whole of the troops have crossed and the bridge 

has been taken up. The works employed for this purpose 

vary according to the nature of the ground to be occupied, 

6* 



130 FIELD FOKTIFICATIOKS. 

the shape and width of the river, the importance of the 
communication, &c. : they consist of redans, lunettes, 
hornworks, or portions of any kind of field work. 

If the bridge is seen from any point on the bank, the 
tete de pont should have at least one face, whose fire may 
sweep that point. Islands should be made to contribute 
to the defence by w^orks erected on them ; these should 
be breastworks for infantry, if the work is within the 
range of that arm, or batteries for field guns. Advantage 
should also be taken of the opposite bank to fortify it in 
a similar manner. If these measures cannot be taken, 
auxiliary flanks may be added to the faces of such a work 
as a redan for the defence of the salients. 

A reduit is frequently constructed within a tete de 
pont, to cover the bridge from the neighboring heights, 
and also to enable a small party of the troops to keep the 
enemy in check until the main body has crossed, and the 
bridge has been taken up ; this rear guard then crosses 
the river in boats or rafts, protected by the fire from the 
opposite side. 

A battery should be constructed so as to enfilade the 
bridge, and to destroy it, should the enemy force the 
reduit. 

The faces or flanks of a tete de pont should have such 
directions given to them that their fire may range directly 
along the banks. 

The best position for a (temporary) military bridge 
and tete is at a re-entering bend of a river ; viz., at a part 
which is concave towards the enemy's side, because then 
the bank which is in possession of the force about to lay 
down the bridge, in part, envelope both that and the tete. 
Thus, while the bridge is covered from the view of the 
enemy, breastworks or batteries may be advantageously 



FIELD FOETinCATIONS. 131 

placed to assist in its defence, and at the same time to 
give an effective cross fire in its front. 

When, however, the bridge is to remain a considerable 
time, these advantages must be given up, and a straight 
part of the river chosen, because there the current acts 
directly against the heads of the boats or pontoons, whereas 
at a bend it acts obliquely against the sides, and thus 
tends constantly to derange their positions. Again, at a 
bend the current is constantly wearing av^^ay the concave 
side, (or bank,) and depositing the earth thus removed at 
the next convex bend, thus causing a shallow bank to be 
formed on one side of the river and a deep part at the 
opposite side ; consequently at every fall of the water, 
in such a place, one end of the bridge is left aground on 
the shallow part, while the other end descends with the 
water, and thus the bridge is in danger of being broken. 

It is evident that the bed of a river will be less irregu- 
lar, and that fords will be most usually found where the 
course is straight : fords are, however, occasionally found 
at the bends of a river in directions obliquely across, from 
one convex part to the next on the opposite side. 

A ford should not be more than four feet deep for 
cavalry, three feet for infantry, and two feet four inches 
for artillery. 

LINES. 

Lines are a series of works and trenches, or of inde- 
pendent works, arranged so as to defend each other, and 
the ground in front of and between them. 

Lines are used to cover the front of a position, or to 
connect important redoubts or forts together. 

Lines are of two kinds, such as are continuous, and 
such as have intervals between the works. 



132 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

The former are principally applicable to situations 
where it is proposed to act on the defensive only, and 
where they are of such limited extent that the whole line 
of parapet can be occupied with troops exclusive of the 
reserves ; as, for instance, to close a pass between scarped 
mountains, or on the sea shore, or on the banks of large 
rivers ; thus resting on natural obstacles, which will pre- 
vent their flanks being turned. They are often introduced 
as portions of an extended line with intervals. 

Extensive continued lines can make but slight resist- 
ance, while the labor necessarily expended in executing 
them is considerable ; and as the enemy may menace 
several points at once, it follows that nearly as many 
troops would be required for the defence as are employed 
in the attack, in which case the first principle of fortification 
is violated. Even if the defenders have a sufficient num- 
ber of disposable troops, they act, when within lines, 
under a disadvantage, for they must watch and follow 
every movement of the enemy, so as to be equally pre- 
pared to resist a false and a real attack. It has often 
happened that while the defenders within lines were con- 
centrating their forces to oppose a false attack, the enemy 
has penetrated at a point where he was not expected ; and 
a continued line once entered may generally be deemed 
lost. 

Continuous lines of redans connected by curtains are 
constructed in three ways : in the first, as described by 
Vauban, the salients of the redans are at 240 yards asun- 
der, and consequently the musketry fire of one redan 
does not, effectively, defend the salient of the next. To 
remedy this defect, it was subsequently recommended that 
the salients of the redans should be brought within musket 
range of each other, or within 160 yards. 

In both of these constructions the flanking angles 



FIELD FORTIFICATIOIS'S. 13d 

formed by the faces of the redans and the curtains joining 
them much exceed 105^, and consequently the flanking 
defence is very imperfect. 

In the third construction the salients are removed to 
240 yards from each other, (the original distance.) but the 
curtain is broken into two parts, forming a salient angle, 
and thus the re-entering or flanking angles are reduced to 
but little more than 90^, by which means the flanking de- 
fence is greatly improved. 

This tracing is, however, still defective, inasmuch as 
it presents double the number of salients to the enemy's 
attacks, and the branches of the broken curtains are ex- 
posed to be enfiladed, which is not the case in Vauban's 
construction. 

Lines of tenailles consist of parapets forming a series 
of salient and re-entering angles, and are, in fact, like the 
improved redan lines, except that, in this tracing, the re- 
dans are all of the same size, and have obtuse angles. 

They are traced by setting off* distances of about 200 
yards along the front of the intended lines, to mark the 
position of the salient angles ; these intervals are then 
bisected, and perpendiculars drawn towards the interior 
to give the places of the re-entering angles. The perpen- 
diculars should not exceed half the distance between the 
salients, otherw^ise the re-entering angles w^ould be less 
than right angles, 

Cremaillere lines are composed of alternate short and 
long faces at right angles (or nearly so) to each other ; 
the short faces, called crotchets, are made about 30 yards 
long, and the long faces, called branches, about 100 yards 
long. 

These lines possess the following advantages : — 

1st. The branches are but little exposed to be enfiladed, 
owing to the small projection of the salients. 



134 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

2dly. Each branch is defended not only by the fire of 
the adjoining crotchet, but by several others. 

3dly. Their outline is very easily adapted to all varie- 
ties of ground ; and on slopes, in particular, they are very 
advantageous, because a small additional height given to 
the crotchets will defilade a long extent of branch from 
the fire of an enemy on the height. 

Their defects are : — 

1st. The crotchets being short, very little of the ditch 
of each is defended by the adjacent branch. 

2dly. A battery which can enfilade one branch is 
equally able to enfilade several. 

Cremaillere lines may be much strengthened by plac- 
inc^ alonor their front bastions or double redans, at inter- 
vals varying from 690 to 800 yards, in order that a cross 
fire of artillery may be brought from them in front of the 
other parts of the line. 

The crotchets should face towards the bastions, or re- 
dans, in order that the fire from the crotchets may defend 
the salients of those works, and that the branches may 
be defiladed by being directed on the bastions or double 
redans. When the line crosses a valley, the branches 
may be most effectually defiladed by giving the w^hole a 
bend concave towards the extei*ior, and placing the bas- 
tions, or redans, on the high ground ; these works will 
thus form the more advanced parts of the line. 

The flanks of the bastions must be connected with the 
next crotchets on both sides by broken curtains, taking 
care that the re-entering angles are not less than right 
angles. 

Bastioned lines are made precisely in the manner al- 
ready pointed out for the fronts of bastioned forts ; such 
lines may be strengthened by lunettes, constructed at 
musket-shot distances in their front, and having their faces 



FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 135 

directed upon those of the bastions, in order that the 
ditches of the lunettes, and the ground in front of them, 
may be defended by those faces. 

The flanks of the lunettes give a direct and close fire 
in front of the salients of the bastions ; but care must be 
taken in their construction that they do not fire into each 
other ; on this account, when the fronts are in one straight 
line, it is usual either to suppress the flanks of the lunettes, 
or to place a lunette on every alternate front only. 

The communication from the lines to the gorge of 
each lunette is by a caponniere, which is, generally, made 
broadest at the inner end, in order to enable the garrison 
to meet the enemy on a superior front, should he succeed 
in getting into it ; its parapet is made only 3 feet above 
the ground that it may not mask the fire of the lines, and 
consequently its interior must be sunk 4 or 5 feet to 
afford the requisite cover ; its breadth must be sufficient 
to allow room for a banquette. A traverse is placed at 
its inner extremity, and, perhaps, (according to the nature 
of the ground and the length of the passage,) at intervals 
along the passage. 

Sometimes the line changes its direction ; in such 
cases, w^hen the change causes the parts of the line to 
form w^ith each other a re-entering angle, the latter is one 
of the strongest parts of the line. 



LINES WITH INTERVALS, OR BROKEN LINES. 

Broken lines should always, when practicable, be dis- 
posed in a double row, and in sucli a manner that the 
inner works may flank tl*e outer ; the advantages pos- 
sessed by broken lines are : — 

1st. With the same extent as continuous lines, they 



136 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

require less labor in the construction, and fewer troops to 
occupy them, consequently large reserves may be formed. 

2dly. The defenders may advance in force and in a 
regular formation through the intervals, and attack the 
enemy, should he have been thrown into confusion. 

3dly. They oblige the enemy to overpower each sep- 
arate work before he can become possessed of the whole ; 
whereas if a continuous line be forced in one part, it is 
generally lost to the defenders. 

4thly. If the enemy has gained one work he will then 
be exposed to the flanking fire of the adjacent w^orks, and 
to a fire from the works in the second line. 

To profit fully by this advantage, when the front line 
consists of closed works, their rear faces ought to be of 
slight construction, that the artillery of the second line 
may easily demolish those faces, if the enemy should gain 
possession of the works. 

When there are two lines of works, the heaviest ar- 
tillery should be placed in the inner line, or else the en- 
emy, obtaining possession of the exterior line, would turn 
the guns against the other, and have a superiority over 
the defenders. 

When lines are on sloping ground descending towards 
the front, the slope should, if possible, be cut very steep, 
so as to form an escarpment before the works. 

A single row of redans or redoubts is comparatively 
weak, for the fire from them crosses at a distance in front 
of the intervals, and but feebly defends the salients. Lu- 
nettes are better in such a situation on account of the fire 
of the flanks, which may be brought to cross the capitals 
close to the salient angles. 

The intervals between the works which form a broken 
line should not exceed 160 yards, in order that they may 
be defended by an eiTective cross fire from those works. 



FIELD FORTIFICATIOKS. 137 

The different works should occupy the most prominent 
and the highest ground ; also the flanking parts ought to 
be perpendicular to their lines of defence. 

The intervals between the works may be strengthened 
by artificial obstacles, or by a trench, for troops, with a 
rough parapet, (like the first parallel in a siege,) having 
a broad interior slope to enable the men to advance over 
it when occasion requires. 



DEFENCE OF FIELD WORKS. 

A spot selected for a military post should not be com- 
manded, especially on the flank or in the rear, within the 
ordinary range of a field piece. There should be plenty 
of materials on the spot to aid in strengthening the 
works, or in forming obstructions in front of them. The 
soil should be of a nature to be easily worked, and the 
position should be difficult of access ; it should, however, 
offer the means of retreating in security, and with facility. 

The highest ground of a position should be occupied 
by the salients of works, for then the adjoining faces will 
be, in some measure, secured from enfilade fire ; it follows 
that the re-entering angles should be placed in the lowest 
spots. 

It is very essential to create obstructions within short 
range of musketry in front of all works of a temporary 
nature, with a view of breaking the order of the assail- 
ants, and detaining them under a close and severe fire, if 
they persist in forcing their way through. 

In fact, all the movements of an enemy, whether to 
the front, to the right or left, should be as much cramped 
and impeded as possible ; it is important to break his 
order and put him into confusion when under fire, for he 



138 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

can seldom re-form under such circumstances ; and if he 
attacks in disorder, the chances are against his success. 

To save time in making palisades or stockade work, 
the whole quantity ought to be divided into distinct por- 
tions, say 10 or 12 feet in length, to one carpenter and 
two laborers ; and to prevent confusion in obtaining ma- 
terials for constructing obstacles, it is well to divide the 
men into parties of 8 or 10 each, prescribing to each 
party the nature of the materials required, the place 
w^here they are to be obtained, and the spot at which they 
are to be deposited. 

The materials are obtained by felling trees, unroofing 
houses, taking up floors, and the like. 

The guns of a work should not, generally, reply to the 
cannonade which precedes an assault, but should be placed 
behind traverses, or other places of shelter previously 
prepared for them ; they should only fire at the enemy's 
artillery, while the latter is changing its position. 

Round shot or shells are fired against guns ; grape, 
canister, spherical case, and rockets against troops. 

As soon as the enemy's light troops advance, the par- 
apets are to be manned ; sand-bags previously filled are 
placed along the parapet, leaving loopholes between 
them ; they are musket-shot proof, and give the men 
the necessary confidence to enable them to take a 
steady aim. One rank of men is sufficient on the ban- 
quette, others being placed behind them to load. A re- 
serve is to be stationed under cover, who fall upon the 
assailants with the bayonet, should they succeed in getting 
into the work. For a good defence there ought to be a 
file per yard to man the parapet, with a reserve of one- 
fourth or one-sixth of the whole, in addition. 

As soon as the assaulting columns begin to mask the 



FIELD FORTIFICATIOKS. 139 

fire of their own artillery, the guns of the work will be 
brought up, and open their fire on them. 

A sortie (very rarely) may be made, should the en- 
emy be thrown into disorder ; but this step requires great 
caution, for should the sortie be repelled, the enemy may 
enter the work with the retiring troops. 

Fougasses, having been previously prepared, will be 
fired the instant the enemy is above them, by means of a 
piece of safety fuze, or a musket with its muzzle in the 
powder and a wire to the trigger. 

If the assailants at length descend into the ditch, shells, 
grenades, and every sort of missile are to be thrown upon 
them. The shells are rolled down by being placed in 
troughs laid on the superior slope of the parapet. 

If the enemy has to cross a river before he arrives at 
the work, the fords may be rendered impassable for ar- 
tillery and cavalry, by digging pits, planting stakes, throw- 
ing in felled trees and harrows, or by driving wagons or 
carts fall of stones into the middle, and taking off the 
wheels. 

Should the ford be beyond musket range from the 
work, a parapet may be raised opposite to it, at such a 
distance from it as to permit the defenders to issue forth 
and charge the party crossing it, at the moment they land 
in disorder on the bank. 

To prevent surprise, outposts are stationed round the 
work at night, and heaps of dried brushwood, or tarred 
fascines, should be placed along the post at intervals ; at 
the approach of the enemy, the outposts retire into the 
work, having set fire to the piles of brushwood ; this will, 
in a great measure, prevent an enemy from concealing 
himself near the work. 



140 FIELD FOKTIFICATIONS. 



LOOPHOLING WALLS. 



Walls are made available for the purposes of defence 
by loopholing them ; if a ditch cannot, for want of time, 
be dug at the foot of the wall outside, the loopholes ought 
to be, at least, 7 feet above the ground, to prevent the 
assailants from making use of them ; in the former case 
a temporary stage might be made of casks, ladders, &c., 
within 4 feet or 4 feet 6 inches of the loopholes, to enable 
the men to fire through them. 

The quickest way of loopholing a wall is to break it 
down from the top in the form of narrow fissures about 
3 feet asunder ; but if the wall is very low, or there is 
not time to make loopholes, a piece of timber, or the 
trunk of a tree, supported on the top of it by a couple of 
stones, would be a ready expedient, and men could fire 
from the opening under it ; or sand-bags, or large stones 
or sods, might be placed on the wall at intervals. The 
loopholes made in walls or buildings can seldom be of 
any regular form ; the width outside should not exceed 3 
inches, but inside it may be equal to the thickness of the 
wall. The best tools (of such as are usually found about 
buildings) to break loopholes through a wall, are crow- 
bars, pickaxes, and large hammers. 

Barricades for roads and streets are made, if time per- 
mits, by sinking a ditch 7 or 8 feet deep, and forming the 
earth into a breastwork, adding palisades, &c. ; but if 
time presses, casks, boxes, or cart bodies filled with earth,, 
stones, manure, or cinders, sacks of flour, bales of mer- 
chandise, and the like, must be arranged across ; paving 
stones may be taken up and disposed in a similar manner. 

The mass should be raised 6 or 7 feet high, and a ban- 
quette formed for firing over it ; the neighboring houses 



FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 141 

should also be loopholed^ so as to give a good flanking 
fire over the ground in front of the barricade, and stones 
may be collected to throw down on the assailants from 
the contiguous houses. 

FORTIFYING HOUSES. 

The great art of converting buildings, and the out- 
houses and walls that usually surround them, into defen- 
sible posts, consists in selecting from the mass of objects 
at hand such as will answer the purpose, and in sacrificing 
every thing else ; making use of the materials to strengthen 
the part which is to be fortified. 

The building chosen should possess some of, or all the 
following requisites : — 

1st. It should command all that surrounds it. 

2dly. It should be substantial, (not thatched,) and of 
a nature to furnish materials useful for placing it in a 
state of defence. 

3dly. It should be of an extent not too great for the 
number of the defenders, and should only require for the 
completion of the proposed object the time and means 
which can be spared. 

4thly. It should have projections flanking the walls 
and angles. 

5thly. It should be difficult of access on the side ex- 
posed to attack, and yet have a safe retreat for the defend- 
ers ; and, of course, it must be in such a position as to 
answer the purpose for which the detachment is posted. 

As a rough guide to judge of the third requisite, there 
ought to be a man for every 4 feet of wall round the in- 
terior of the lower story, one man to 6 feet for the second 
story, one to 8 feet for an attic, with a reserve of about 
one-sixth of the whole. 



14:2 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

Should there exist any doubt about having sufficient 
time to execute all that might be wished, it would be nec- 
essary to decide on the best points to be secured, in order 
to repel an immediate attack ; in such a case it might be 
well to employ as many men as could work without hin- 
dering each other by being too crowded, to collect mate- 
rials, and barricade the doors and windows on the ground 
floor, to make loopholes in them, and to level any ob- 
struction outside that would give cover to the enemy, or 
facilitate the attack ; to sink ditches opposite the doors 
on the outside, and arrange loopholes in the windows of 
the upper story ; to make loopholes through the walls 
generally, attending first to the most exposed parts, and 
to break communications through all the party walls and 
partitions ; to place abatis or any feasible obstruction on 
the outside, and to improve the defence of the post by 
the construction of tambours ; to place outbuildings and 
garden walls in a state of defence, and establish communi- 
cations between them ; to make arrangements (in the 
lower story particularly) for defending one room after 
another, so that a partial possession only could be ob- 
tained on a sudden attack being made. 

These different works should be undertaken in the 
order of their relative importance, according to circum- 
stances ; and after securing the immediate object for which 
they were designed, they might remain to be improved on, 
if an opportunity should offer. 

Houses are fortified by piercing loopholes through 
the walls, and if the walls are high, two, or even three 
rows of loopholes may be made, and a temporary scaf- 
folding of furniture, casks, &;c., erected for firing from the 
upper ones : one row may be made close to the ground, 
with pits dug in the rear, or the floor may be cut through, 
if there is a basement, for the convenience of making use 



FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 143 

bf them. The loopholes may have the dimensions before 
prescribed, and they ought not to be made at a less dis- 
tance than three feet from each other, lest the wall should 
be too much weakened, or the defenders inconveniently 
crowded. 

The staircases are to be cut away, the communication 
being kept up by ladders ; and the floors, as well as the 
partition walls, should be loopholed. 

Thatched roofs and all combustible materials are to be 
removed, and barrels of water should be placed in every 
room in readiness to extinguish fire. 

A communication ought to be opened on the side fur- 
thest from the enemy, through which ammunition and 
reinforcements may enter. 

The door or barrier closing -this communication may 
be made musket-proof by nailing strong planks to it, and 
if there is a basement to the house, the floor should be 
cut away within the door, so as to form a sort of ditch. 

All the doors and windows are to be barricaded and 
loopholed. The best barricade for a door is made by 
strong palisades, which are secured to a thick cross beam 
let into the wall on each side ; a bank of earth may also 
be formed on the exterior. 

A flanking defence can always be obtained by con- 
structing a tambour in front of a side, or at the angles of 
a house. 

All enclosures which may afford the enemy cover 
must be removed, if not included in the defence. 

If artillery is likely to be employed against the house, 
it will be necessary, unless the walls are very strong, to 
support the timbers of the roof by means of props. 

If there is time, the house may be formed into a 
blockhouse by pulling down the upper stories, and laying 



144 FIELD FOKTIFICATIONS. 

the materials over the lower rooms to make the covering 
shell-proof. 

A ditch may be dug on the outside of the house, and 
the earth placed against the walls : some protection may 
be obtained for the doors, by placing strong beams against 
the walls on the outside in an inclined position, and heap- 
ing earth or rubbish over them. 

INTRENCHING A VILLAGE. 

In intrenching a village, the buildings, walls, and 
hedges on its circuit are to be considered as part of its 
enclosure, and are to be made fit for the purposes of de- 
fence ; all the intervals between them are to be occupied 
by breastworks or palisades, and strengthened by abatis. 

The streets are to be barricaded at intervals with carts 
or wagons having one or two wheels taken off, with barrels 
of earth, bales of merchandise, &c. A passage should be 
made through the adjoining houses, which should be loop- 
holed, and care must be taken that the barricade be not 
turned by an enemy passing down the neighboring streets. 

Some strong building, such as a church, court-house, 
or jail, should be selected, and fortified with particular 
care, to serve as a citadel or reduit, to which the defenders 
may retire when driven in from the exterior part of the 
village. 

Advantage must be taken of any walls or outbuildings 
surrounding whatever has been selected as the reduit or 
keep ; and they should be converted into outworks for 
strengthening it as an independent post. Should the vil- 
lage be of too great an extent for the force thrown into it, 
a portion of it only might be strengthened, and the re- 
mainder separated or destroyed ; or the defence might be 
confined to some separate building. 



FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 145 

The roads by which an enemy would advance should 
be cut up, and obstructed with felled trees, ploughs, har- 
rows, (kc, ; bridges should be broken, and the passage 
disputed under cover of some simple field work placed 
favorably to command the road. 

The resolute defence of villages situated on the front 
of an army has often decided the fate of a battle ; in this 
position, they may be regarded as bastions connected by 
movable curtains. 



ATTACK ON FIELD WORKS. 

The attack on field works may be executed by sur- 
prise, or by open force ; the former can only take place 
when the advance of the assailants is concealed by fog or 
darkness, or by the nature of the ground, as in mountain- 
ous countries. 

In the attack of field works by open force, it is ad- 
visable to advance against several points at the same mo- 
ment, when circumstances permit ; of these some may be 
false attacks, and may be converted into real ones if the 
, enemy appears w^eak or hesitating on the points threat- 
ened. One attack ought, generally, to be directed upon 
the rear of the w^ork, (if open at the gorge,) which will 
always lessen the confidence of the defenders. 

As many assaulting columns should be formed as 
there are points to be attacked, and before the works are 
stormed, pits and trenches should (when time permits, 
and there is no natural cover for skirmishers) be dug to 
conceal riflemen : these pits are about four feet wide, and, 
with the excavated earth raised before them, four feet in 
depth, in order that they may serve to cover a file of men 
to that height. 
7 



146 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

The artillery should be posted on the prolohgations 
of the faces to enfilade them, weaken the parapets, and 
ruin the interior defences of the work and its ditch ; for 
the latter purpose howitzers are best adapted. As soon 
as the artillery has produced some effect, the signal for 
the assault should be given ; light troops will gradually 
advance towards the counterscarp, in skirmishing order, 
firing at the gunners through the embrasures ; they will 
conceal themselves in the pits and trenches prepared for 
them, or seek shelter in the inequalities of the ground. 
They should be followed by storming parties, and these 
should be accompanied by a detachment of sappers, (or a 
squad of soldiers told off for that purpose,) carrying axes, 
crowbars, bags of powder, &c., to force obstacles. Lastly, 
the reserve will follow, at some distance, to act as cir- 
cumstances may require ; it may repel attempts to aid 
the defenders, reinforce the storming parties if they suc- 
ceed in entering the work, or it may afford them a rally- 
ing point, and cover their retreat if they fail. 

The troops descend into the ditch with unfixed bayo- 
nets, in order to avoid accidents ; and they fix them when 
on the berme. 

Should the ditches have a great depth, it will be neces- 
sary to lessen it by means of bags with heather or grass, 
or by bundles of hay or straw, or fascines, &;c. 

A bridge formed of a gun limber and a ladder may 
be run up to the counterscarp and thrown across. 

To avoid mistakes in marching by night to attack, 
each soldier should bear some visible mark by which he 
may be distinguished from an enemy. If a breach or any 
particular point is to be attacked by night, the way to it 
should be marked by distinguishable pickets or other ob- 
jects, placed or re-marked on the ground at the time of the 
previous reconnoissance. 



FIELD FOKTIFICATIONS. 147 

The columns march to the assault in the direction of 
the capitals ; but after passing the ditch, the troops should 
enter the works by the faces, on each side of the salient 
angle, that they may present a front in the work equal 
or superior to that of the enemy. When it may be ad- 
visable to force an entrance at the gate of a fortified post, 
that gate may be destroyed by a piece of artillery brought 
close up to it, or by a bag of powder attached to the wood 
by a gimlet, or propped against it by a forked stick. 

In assaulting a place whose scarps and counterscarps 
are revetted with masonry, scaling ladders must be em- 
ployed. The first division of each column of assault car- 
ries the longest ladders ; they descend into the ditch with 
them, and afterwards carry the ladders across and raise 
them against the scarp. 

The next division carries other ladders, which they 
place and leave against the counterscarp. The ladders 
are carried and planted with arms slung. Ladders plant- 
ed against a wall are not to slope above one-- fourth of 
their height, lest they should break under the weight of 
the men. 

A strong firing party is drawn up on the glacis to 
keep down the fire of the defenders, if the latter should 
•appear on the parapets to oppose the assault. 



ATTACKING^ HOUSES. 

In the attack of houses, artillery should be employed 
to form a breach before giving the assault, and also to 
throw hot shot, shells, and carcasses. 

If the detachment is. unprovided with artillery, at- 
tempts must be made to force passages through doors, 
wmdows, or unflanked parts of the walls : the attack 



148 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 

should be made on different parts of the building, to dis. 
tract the attention of the defenders ; in the mean time, 
and for the same purpose, parties of men keep up a fire 
on any points where there is a chance of disabling them. 
Attempts may also be made to effect an entrance through 
the roof, by means of ladders. 

If the assailants have neither powder nor crowbars for 
forcing doors, a heavy beam or tree may, if at hand, be 
used as a battering ram ; a fire of straw or brushwood 
may be made near the walls further to distract and alarm 
the defenders, and to cover the operations of the assailants. 



ATTACKING BARRICADES. 

Artillery will soon clear a passage through ordinary 
barricades ; if not, the assaulting party must endeavor to 
turn the barricade, either by passing down some other 
street, or by forcing a passage from one house to another, 
until they arrive in rear of it : a few loaded muskets ap- 
plied to the locks and bolts of the strongest door will 
force it open, and the partition walls may be destroyed 
by bags of powder, &c. After having taken possession 
of a house, troops must be left in it for the purpose of 
firing from it upon the barricade. 



CHAPTER X. 

ARTILLERY. 

The pieces of artillery in ordinary use are: guns, 
howitzers, and mortars. They are made either of iron or 
brass, (gun metal.) 

Brass guns are made of a metal composed of 8 parts 
of tin to 100 of copper, and cost about $900 per ton ; 
iron guns cost $100 per ton. 

Brass guns are used for field batteries, as they can 
be made with a less quantity of metal than iron guns of 
the same calibre, without danger of bursting. Therefore, 
though brass is heavier than iron, guns of the former 
metal are lighter than those of the latter. Brass guns 
are, however, soon rendered unserviceable by repeated 
and quick firing. 

Iron guns are better adapted for the attack or defence 
of fortresses, and for service on board of ship, being less 
expensive than those of brass, and better able to sustain 
long continued and rapid firing. 

At the siege of St. Sebastian, each piece fired 350 
rounds in Ib^ hours without becoming unserviceable : 
brass guns could not have fired 120 rounds in the same 
time, without drooping at the muzzle and running at the 
vent so much as to become useless. 

The length of a gun is measured from the rear of the 
base or breech-ring to the face of the muzzle. 



150 ARTILLERY. 

The CALIBRE is the diameter of the bore. 

The DISPART is the excess of half the diameter of the 
base ring (or thickest part of the gun) above half the di- 
ameter of the nmzzle. Guns are made thicker at the 
breech than at the muzzle, the better to resist the expan- 
sive force of the powder. 

The TRUNNIONS are projections or arms one on each 
side of the gun, by which it is secured and supported in 
the carriage. 

The WINDAGE is the excess of the diameter of the bore 
over the diameter of the shot, and is, in field guns, about 
■^Q the diameter of the shot ; in iron guns it is about ^ 
inch.* 

Guns are named according to the number of pounds 
contained in the round shot they carry ; thus a 6-pounder 
carries a 6 lb. shot ; a 12-pounder carries a 12 lb. 
shot, etc. 

The service charge of powder for battering is one- 
third of the weight of the shot. 

The charge for field guns is from ^ to -J of the weight 
of the shot, as a greater charge is found to injure the car- 
riages without producing an equivalent effect. 

For ricochet firing, the charge varies from Jg- to -Jg the 
weight of the shot ; and the elevation of the gun from 5° 
to 9°. 

To increase the range of the gun, an increase of eleva- 
tion above a horizontal line must be given to the axis of 
the gun. 

In pointing a gun, the line of direction is given from 
the trail, and the elevation from the breech. 



* 12, 9, and 6 pounders liave Vio iiich windage ; a 3 pounder has Vioo i^ch ; 
82 pounder from V5 inch to Vs ii^ch, according to the length ; 24 pounder 
about Vfl iiich ; 18 pounder about V7 iiich. Carronades have a windage of V64 
the diameter of the shot. 



ARTILLERY. 151 

Point-blank position of the gun denotes that the piece 
is laid, directly, at the object without elevation : to effect 
this, the lowest notch on the side of the base ring, the 
notch on the side of the muzzle, and the object to be fired 
at, are brought into one line ; the two notches are in a 
plane passing through the axis of the bore, and that plane 
may be parallel or oblique to the horizon. 

Point-blank range is the distance from the muzzle of 
the gun to the first point at which the shot strikes the 
ground ; it being supposed that the latter is parallel to 
the axis of the bore. 

If the gun is pointed at an object, by looking along 
the upper surface of it, (for which purpose there is a notch 
behind the vent, and one on the top of the muzzle,) it is 
said to be laid by the line of metal, and it gives the gun 
an elevation of about one degree ; the breech being wider 
than the muzzle. 

The upper right hand quadrant of the base ring has 12 
quarter degrees (called quarter sights) notched on it ; by 
bringing the object, the notch on the side of the muzzle, 
and any quarter sight into one line, a corresponding ele- 
vation or depression is given to the gun. 

The tangent-scale is raised from a groove behind the 
vent, and can be fixed at any point of its length by a 
screw ; it is divided into quarter degrees from one degree 
upwards : by means of this scale the requisite elevation, 
as far as 6 or 8 degrees, may be given with great accu. 
racy, the object being seen in a line with the top of the 
tangent-scale, and the notch on the top of the muzzle. 

The point blank range of light (brass) 12, 6, and 3- 
pounders, is 200 yards ; medium 12 and 9-pounders and 
heavy 6-pounders, 300 yards ; iron (long) 24-pounders, 
360 yards. 

Every quarter of a degree of elevation increases the 



152 ARTILLERY. 

range of each class by 100 yards until there are attained, 
respectively, the ranges of 600, 700, and 1200 yards, 
after which each quarter of a degree increases the range 
by a less amount than 100 yards. 

Howitzers ^ are a short description of ordnance with 
chambers, and are used, principally, for projecting shells 
horizontally or nearly so. 

Their principal advantages are, that they can be more 
easily loaded, and are considerably lighter, in proportion 
to their calibre than guns ; they m^, also, be used as 
mortars : they have no dispart, the diameter of the base 
ring and swell of the muzzle being equal, or the difference 
being made up by a patch on the muzzle. 

Howitzers are intended for enfilade and ricochet firing, 
to reach troops behind heights and parapets, and to breach 
earthen works by firing shell into them : for these pur- 
poses heavy charges are not necessary, although the bores 
may be large *, the chamber is formed so as to confine 
the powder as much as possible, and so that the shell 
may rest on its mouth. 

Mortars differ from guns in the construction of their 
bore, their chamber being in the shape of a frustum of a 
cone, by which means the powder is confined, and the 
shell fits close to the sides ; they are also much shorter 
and thicker than guns : they have trunnions at the ex- 
tremity of the breech, and are usually placed on their 
beds so as to project shells, carcasses, or fire balls at an 
angle of 45°, the range being increased by augmenting 
the charge of powder. 

The shells discharged from mortars describe a high 
curve in their flight, and fall with their full weight almost 
vertically upon the object to be struck ; they thus frac- 

* The charges for certain howitzers are as follows :-^10-inch, 7 lbs. ; 8-inch, 
4 lbs. ; 5i-inch, (24-pounder,) 2 to 2ilbs. ; 42/5 -inch, (12ipounder,) i to i lb. 



ARTILLERY. 153 

ture the strongest buildings, and bursting at the same 
time, they set fire to every thing combustible about 
them. 

Their splinters are also very destructive, and fty in 
all directions, sometimes as far as 400 yards. As mor- 
tars fire over the parapet, and not through embrasures, 
it is necessary that they should be placed at a distance 
of 12 feet behind the crest of the parapet, supposing it to 
be of the ordinary height. 

Rockets are cylindrical cases of pasteboard * or iron, 
attached to one end of a rod of wood, and containing a 
composition, which being ignited, they are projected 
through the air by a force arising from the combustion. 

Military rockets terminate either in a cone or a par- 
abolid, and may serve either as shells or carcasses : their 
weight is from 3 to 32 lbs. They are, in general, fired 
from tubes, and the proper elevation is about a degree 
for each hundred yards in the intended range. Fired 
against troops they create much disorder, and falling on 
buildings, they destroy them or set them on fire. 

The length of the rod is about 60 diameters of the 
rocket, and the composition with which the cylinder is 
filled consists generally of saltpetre, sulphur, and charcoal 
or gunpowder. The composition is rammed into the case, 
but a void space is left about the axis, in order that a 
considerable surface may be at once in a state of combus- 
tion. At the choke or neck of the rocket there are several 
apertures, at one of which the fire is communicated to the 
composition. 

The cause of the rocket's motion is, the excess of the 
pressure produced by the burning material at the head of 
the rocket above the pressure at the neck, when jpart of 

* The former are for signals, and the latter are for military service. 



154 ARTILLERY. 

the flame escapes through the apertures ; the stick serves 
to guide the rocket in its flight. 

Shells are hollow shot with a hole to Veceive the fuse ; 
they are discharged, usually, from mortars and howitzers, 
and are charged with a quantity of powder sufficient to 
burst them when at the end of their range ; the fuze being 
cut of such a length that the charge may be ignited at the 
proper moment. 

To breach earthen works, the shells are fired horizon- 
tally, from howitzers, with reduced charges, that the fuze 
may not be extinguished before igniting the powder in 
the shell : this powder is a bursting charge. 

Carcasses are shells with three fuze holes ; they are 
filled with a peculiar composition, which flames out of the 
holes w^ith great power and fury for about ten minutes : 
they are thrown from mortars, howitzers, and guns, to 
set fire to buildings, and sometimes to serve as light 
balls. 

Shrapnell shells, or spherical-case shot, are shells filled 
with musket balls, having a bursting charge of powder 
mixed with them. They are discharged from guns and 
howitzers, and have a fuze like that of a common shell, 
but shorter, in order that the shell may burst in the air 
before the completion of its range ; in this manner mus- 
ket balls and the splinters of the shell can be poured into 
a column of troops at 1,200 yards distance. • 

Common case, or canister shot, are cylindrical tin 
canisters with wooden or iron bottoms, containing from 
12 to 70 shot, which vary in weight from 1^ oz. to 8 oz. 
each, according to the calibre of the gun. As they burst 
nearly at the mouth of the gun, their effect cannot be de- 
pended on beyond 200 yards, although they are used at 
a greater distance. 

Grape shot are of two patterns ; either the balls are 



ARTILLEKY. 155 

quilted round an iron pin with a circular plate at the 
bottom, or a pin runs through a succession of plates, be- 
tween every two of which is a tier of balls ; in the latter 
case they are also called " tier shot." 

In the first pattern, the shot soon corrode the canvas 
quilting, therefore the second is preferred : there are 9 
shot in each round, each shot varying in weight from 8 
oz. to 4 lbs. according to the calibre of the gun ; the most 
effective range is about 200 yards. 

Hand grenades are shells of about 1 lb. 13 oz. weight, 
with a fuze and bursting charge ; they can be thrown, by 
the hand, about 25 or 30 yards ; they are useful for the 
defence of breaches and unflanked works. 

Gunpowder is composed of 75 parts saltpetre, 15 
charcoal, and 1 sulphur in every hundred parts : a cubic 
foot of it weighs about 55 lbs. 

A shell fuze is a funnel-shaped tube of well-seasoned 
beech, filled with a composition of saltpetre, sulphur, 
and mealed gunpowder. 

Portfire is a composition of saltpetre, charcoal, and 
sulphur, pressed closely into a cylinder of white brown 
paper : they are made in lengths of 16 inches, and are 
used to discharge guns, to ignite bags of powder, &c. 

Portfire and shell fuzes burn at the rate of one inch 
in five seconds : Bickford's fuze (which will burn under 
water) burns 6 inches in 5 seconds, or 2 yards in a 
minute. 

To fire shot or shells a ricochet, or in such a manner 
that they make several bounds during their course, it is 
necessary to give the gun or howitzer a charge, and an 
elevation depending on the extent of the range required. 
In enfilading a work ricochet, the gun should be placed 
nearly in the direction of the interior slope of the parapet 



156 ARTILLERY. 

produced ; and its elevation should be such that the shot 
may just clear the crest of the parapet in front. 

Ricochet firing against guns in a work, is useless if 
carried on at a greater distance than 650 yards ; the best 
range is about 400 yards. 

Round shot are sometimes fired red hot from heavy 
guns, to set on fire buildings, blockhouses, shipping, and 
any defences in the construction of which timber has been 
employed. 

It requires about three-quarters of an hour to heat a 
24 pound shot when the furnace has been previously pre- 
pared ; double that time if not. In loading, a tight dry 
wad is placed over the powder, and afterwards a wet wad, 
first soaked, and then well wrung ; next, the gun being 
slightly elevated, the shot is brought up, by means of an 
instrument called the carrier, and rolled home ; if it is 
required to depress the gun, another wet wad must be 
placed over the shot. 

A gun platform is a flooring of wood or stone, to pre- 
vent the wheels or trucks of a gun carriage from sinking 
into the ground : the garrison and siege platforms are 
10 feet wide at the head, 15 feet long, and 14 feet wide at 
the splay or tail. 







I 



CHAPTEE XI. 

MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 

1. For iDstruction in the manual of light artillery, 
the piece selected is the light 12-pdr. howitzer, used for 
mountain service, on account of its simplicity, and as em- 
bracing all the principles required for serving a light field 
piece. It is generally transported by mules. The piece 
and the shafts may be packed upon one mule, the carriage 
upon another, and the ammunition chest upon a third. 
The carriage is adapted for draught. 

In case the pieces are served by a fully organized 
company, a jumper or short light pole, with a cross-piece 
of iron at the end, is substituted for the shafts. A rope, 
attached to the axle-tree and running through rings in the 
cross-piece, enables the detachments to draw the pieces. 
In coming into battery, the rope is detached and held in 
a coil ready for use. 

2. The mule that draws the piece, or carries it when 
packed, is called the shaft mule ; the mule that carries 
the carriage, when packed, the carriage mule ; and the 
mule on which the ammunition chests are packed, the am- 
munition mule, 

3. The piece is in battery when the shafts are detached 
and it is in a proper position to be fired. The front in 
this case is the direction towards which the muzzle points. 



158 MAI^UAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 

The front, when the shafts are attached, is the direction 
towards which the shafts point. The right of the piece, 
in both cases, is the right of the cannoneer when facing 
to the front. 

The position of the mules, when the piece is in bat- 
tery, is as follows : 

The ammunition mule fifteen yards in rear of the 
piece, the shaft mule two yards in rear of the ammunition 
mule, and the carriage mule two yards in rear of the 
shaft mule, all facing towards the piece. 

4. In the order of marcli^ with the howitzer mounted 
on its carriage, the shaft mule is hitched in, and the car- 
riage and ammunition mules follow ; the first two yards 
from the piece, and the second two yards from the first. 

5. In the order of march, with the piece and carriage 
packed upon the mules, the shaft mule leads, and the other 
two follow ; the distance between each being two yards. 

FORMING THE DETACHMENT. 

6. Six men are required for the service of the piece. 
They are formed in two ranks, and told off from the right 
by the chief of piece ; Nos. 1 and 2 being on the right. 
No. 3 and the gunner being in the centre, and Nos. 4 
and 5 on their left ; the even numbers and the gunner 
being in the front, and the odd numbers in the rear rank. 

The detachment is marched to the piece, and posted 
as follows : 

POSTS OF THE DETACHMENT. 

7. In battery, Nos. 1 and 2 about one yard outside 
of the wheels, and in line with the axle-tree, No. 1 being 
on the right, and No. 2 on the left ; the gunner at the 



MANUAL FOE LIGHT ARTILLERY. 159 

end of the trail ; No. 3 opposite the knob of the cascable, 
covering No. 1 ; No. 4 on the right, and No. 5 on the 
left of the ammunition mule ; all facing to the front. 
The chief of piece is opposite to the trail, outside of and 
near the left cannoneers. 

8. In battery J without mules, Nos. 4 and 5 are on the 
right and left of the ammunition chests, facing to the, 
front. 

9. In the order of march^ shaft mules hitched in, Nos. 

1 and 2 opposite to the muzzle ; the gunner and No. 3 
opposite to the trail ; and Nos. 4 and 5 opposite to the 
saddle of the ammunition mule ; the gunner and even 
numbers on the right, and the odd numbers on the left ; 
all facing to the front, and covering each other in lines 
one yard from the wheels. The chief of piece is on the 
left of the driver of the shaft mule. 

10. In the order of march^ mules packed, Nos. 1 and 

2 at the shaft mule ; the gunner and No. 3 at the car- 
riage mule ; and Nos. 4 and 5 at the ammunition mule ; 
the gunner and even numbers on the right, and odd num- 
bers on the left ; all opposite to the saddles, one yard 
from the mules, and facing to the front. The chief of 
piece is on the left of the driver of the shaft mule. 

11. There is one driver to each mule. He is on the 
left of the mule, and holds the reins with the right hand, 
six inches from the mouth, the hand high and firm. 



SERVICE OF THE PIECE. 

12. The piece is in battery, the men at their posts. 
(No. 7.) 

The shafts are placed on the ground, one yard and a 
half from the line of the right wheel, and parallel to it, 



160 MANUAL FOR LIGHT AKTILLERY. 

the cross-bar opposite to the trail, the shafts pointing to 
the rear. 

The chests, when the ammunition mule is absent, are 
on the ground, fifteen yards in rear of the trail, their sides 
parallel to the axis of the piece, backs together, the turn- 
buckles outside. 

13. At the command Take Equipments, the gunner 
distributes the equipments. No. 1, with the assistance 
of No. 3, takes out the sponge. The gunner equips him- 
self with the belt containing the hausse and priming wire, 
and with the knee-guard and the finger-stall, wearing the 
last on the second finger of the left hand. No. 3 wears 
the tube pouch containing friction tubes and the lanyard. 
Nos. 1 and 2 wear bricoles hung from the left shoulder 
to the rio^ht side. Nos. 2 and 5 wear haversacks huno: 
from the right shoulder to the left side. 



THE commands. 

14. In loading by detail, the instructor gives all the 
commands. 

The commands are : Load hy detail^ Load, 2, 3, 4 ; 
Sponge, 2, 3, 4 ; Ram, 2, 3 ; Ready ; Fire ; and Cease 
Firing. 

When the service of the piece is not executed by de- 
tail, the commands of the instructor are, either Load, 
Commence Firing, and Cease Firing ; or. Commence 
Firing and Cease Firing. After the command Commence 
Firing, the action is continued without further commands 
from the instructor until the command Cease Firing. 

The last command is repeated by the chief of piece 
and the gunner. 



MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 161 



DUTIES OF THE CANNONEERS. 

15. Duties of the Gunner, — In action, the gunner 
gives or repeats the commands of execution. At the 
command or signal to commence firing, he gives the 
v/ord Load ; plants the left foot opposite to the knob of 
the cascable ; places the right knee upon the ground near, 
and on the left of the trail ; places the hausse, when it is 
used ; seizes the lunette with the right hand, to give the 
direction, and at the same time tends vent with the second 
finger of the left hand, the thumb on the base of the 
breech. 

As soon as the piece is loaded and aimed, he removes 
the hausse ; then rising pricks the cartridge ; gives the 
word Ready, and stepping clear of the wheel to the side 
whence he can best observe the effect of the shot, gives 
the command, Firs. He continues the action in the same 
manner, without farther commands from the instructor, 
until the firing is ordered to cease. 

When the instructoi*, instead of giving the command 
Commence Firing, gives that of Load, the gunner repeats 
it, and performs the same duties as just described, except 
that he does not command Fire, until the firing is ordered 
to commence. 

When the instructor gives all the commands, the 
gunner performs the same duties, but without repeating 
the commands. 

16. Duties of ISfo, 1. — Until the command Load, he 
stands square to the front, in line with the axle-tree, hold- 
ing the sponge staff about the middle in the right hand, 
and trailing it at an angle of 45°. 

For the convenience of instruction, the duties of No. 
1 are divided into motions. 



162 MANUAL FOK LIGHT ARTILLERY. 

First motion, — At the command Load, No. 1 faces to 
his left, steps obliquely to his right with the right foot, 
and brings the sponge into a perpendicular position over 
the right toe, the elbow clooe to the side, the right hand 
at the height of the elbow. 

Second motion. — He plants the left foot near, and in 
line with the wheel, and inclmes the sponge across the 
body to the left, the right opposite to the middle of the 
body. 

Third motion, — He places the right foot twelve inches 
to the right of the left, heels on the same line ; brings 
the sponge into a horizontal position, and extending the 
hands towards the ends of the staff, back of the right hand 
up, that of the left down, rests the sponge-head agamst 
the face of the piece ; the knees straight, the feet turned 
out equally, and the body inclined forward. 

Fourth motion, — He introduces the sponge, drops the 
left hand by the side of his thigh, and shoves the sponge 
to the bottom of the chamber. 

17. At the command Sponge, he carefully sponges 
out the chamber. 

Second motion, — He draws out the sponge, pressing 
it upon the bottom of the bore, seizes the staff near the 
sponge-head with the left hand, back down, and rests it 
against the face of the piece. 

Third motion, — He turns the sponge over by bringing 
the hands together at the middle of the staff, and giving 
it a cant with each, throws the sponge over ; at the same 
time turning the wrists so as to bring the staff horizon- 
tal. He then extends the hands towards the ends of the 
staff, back of the left up, that of the right down. 

Fourth motion, — As soon as the charge is inserted he 
introduces the rammer-head into the muzzle, and joins the 
left hand to the right. 



MANUAL FOR LIGHT AKTILLEKY. 163 

18. At the command Ram, he sends the charge care- 
fully home, throwing the left hand over the piece. 

Second motion. — He throws out the sponge with the 
right hand, letting it slide through the hand as far as the 
middle of the staff, when he grasps it firmly, and seizing- 
it close to the rammer -head with the left hand, back up, 
rests it against the face of the piece. 

Third motion. — He raises the sponge to the height of 
his breast, and steps back, right foot first, to his position 
opposite to the axle-tree ; quits the staff with the left 
hand, and throwing the sponge uppermost, holds it at a 
trail in the right. He remains facing the piece until the 
command Load, when he steps up and performs the duties 
just described. 

When the loading is not by detail. No. 1 goes through 
all his duties at the command Load. 

At the flash of the gun, or command Load, he steps 
up and again performs his duties as before, and so on, 
until the command Cease Firing is given. At this com- 
mand he resumes his post, faces to the front, first spong- 
ing out the piece if it has been commenced. 

19. Duties of Nos. 2 and 5. — Until the command 
Load, Nos. 2 and 5 stand square to the front, the former 
in line with the axle-tree, the latter on the lefl of the am- 
munition mule, or chests. 

At this command, No. 2 faces about and goes to the 
ammunition chest ; and No. 5, having received a round 
of ammunition from No. 4, carries it to the piece ; placing 
himself opposite to No. 1, and in line with the wheel, 
inserts the charge as soon as No. 1 has sponged, then 
steps back to the post of No. 2, opposite to the axle-tree, 
and there remains facing the piece until it is fired, when 
he returns to the ammunition chest. No, 2 ; having re- 
ceived a round of ammunition, carries it to within five 



164 MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 

yards of the wheel, where he remains until the piece is 
fired ; he then moves forward and executes the remainder 
of the service as just described for No. 5. 

Nos. 2 and 5, in moving to and from the piece, go at 
a run and pass each other by the right. 

In inserting the charge they should be careful to keep 
the seam down, and to place the fuze in the axis of the 
bore. 

At the command Cease Firing, they resume their 
posts, facing to the front. 

20. Duties of No, 3.— No. 3 holds the handle of the 
lanyard in the right hand, the cord passing between the 
fingers, the hook between the forefinger and thumb. At 
the oommand Load, he takes a friction tube in the left 
hand, and passes the hook of the lanyard through the eye 
of the tube from right to left, continuing to hold the hook 
between the thumb and forefinger. At the word Eeady, 
he faces the piece, and steps up, keeping outside of the 
wheel ; inserts the tube, steps back with the right foot, 
breaks to his rear a full pace with the left foot, and holds 
the lanyard slightly stretched, the handle at the height of 
the knee, back of the hand up, the left hand against the 
thigh. At the command Fire, he gives a smart pull 
upon the lanyard, being careful to keep the hand low, 
and then resumes his post. 

At the command Cease Firing, he winds the lanyard 
upon its handle, and if dry, puts it in the tube pouch. 

21. Duties of No, 4. — No. 4 attends at the ammu- 
nition chest, serves out ammunition, and prepares and 
inserts fuzes. 

CHANGING POSTS. 

22. In order to instruct the men in all the duties at 



]VIANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLEKY. 165 

the piece, the instructor causes them to change posts by 
the following commands : 

1. Change Posts. 2. March. 

At the first command, the cannoneers on the right of 
the piece face about, take off their equipments, and place 
them on the piece or ammunition chests. At the second 
command, all step off, each taking the post and equip- 
ments of the one in his front ; No. 2 passing around the 
muzzle to gain the post of No. 1, and No. 4 around the 
ammunition chest to take that of No. 5. 

23. During the intervals of rest, the instructor will 
explain to the men the nomenclatures of the piece and 
carriage, and the names and uses of the implements and 
equipments. 

SERVICE OF THE PIECE WITH DETACHMENTS OF DIFFERENT 
STRENGTHS. 

24. Tivo men. The gumier commands, tends vent, 
points, pricks, primes, and fires. No. 1 sponges, serves 
ammunition, and loads. 

Three men. The gunner commands, tends vent, points, 
pricks, primes, and fires. No. 1 sponges. No. 2 serves 
ammunition, and loads. 

Four men. The gunner commands, tends vent, points, 
and pricks. No. 1 sponges. No. 2 serves ammunition, 
and loads. No. 3 primes and fires. 

Five men. No. 4 attends at the chests, and serves 
ammunition to No. 2, occasionally alternating with him. 
The other numbers serve as with four men. 

Six men. No 5 alternates habitually with No. 2. 
No. 4 remains at the chests. The other numbers serve 
as with four men. 



166 MANUAL FOK LIGHT ARTILLERY. 



THE LOCKING ROPE. 

25. The locking rope is habitually coiled and sus- 
pended from the front arc of the saddle of the shaft mule. 
When it becomes necessary to use it in order to prevent 
the too great recoil of the piece, No. 2, on receiving orders 
to that effect, brings it up from the mule, and, with the 
assistance of No. 1, locks the wheels. No. 2 attaches one 
end of it by a timber hitch to the felly of the left wheel, 
near the ground, and No. 1 attaches the other end in the 
same manner to the right wheel, the rope passing over 
the stock. The length of the rope should be regulated by 
the nature of the ground. 

When in firing it becomes necessary to run the piece 
forward, the locking rope is detached; No. 2 carries it; 
and it is reattached as soon as the piece is in battery. 
When not in use it is placed on the ground, outside of 
and near No. 2. 

When the firing is to be discontinued, No. 2 returns 
it to its place on the saddle. The locking rope should not 
be used when it can be avoided ; since on rough ground 
it is liable to break the wheels, and on soft ground to 
upset the carriage. 



ATTACHING AND DETACHING THE SHAFTS. 

26. To attach the shafts, the instructor commands : 

Attach Shafts. 

The gunner raises the trail ; No. 3 springs in between 
the shafts, seizes them about twelve inches from the cross- 
bar, and places the supporting bar upon the trail ; the 
gunner then puts in the key and lowers the trail to the 
ground. No. 1, with the assistance of No. 3, puts up 



MANUAL FOR LIGHT ABTILLEEY. 167 

the sponge ; and the cannoneers about the piece assume 
their posts as in the order of march, shaft mule hitched in. 

27. To detach the shafts, the instructor commands : 

Detach Shafts. 

The gunner raises the trail, and unkeys the shafts ; 
No. 3 springs in between them, seizes them about twelve 
inches from the cross-bar, (the gunner at the same time 
lowering the trail to the ground,) detaches, and places 
them as prescribed in No. 12. 

No. 1, with the assistance of No. 3, takes out the 
sponge ; and the cannoneers about the piece take their 
posts as in battery. 

MOVING the piece BY MEAXS OF THE CANNONEERS. 

28. The shafts detached. , The instructor commands : 
1. B]/ hand to the front (or rear,) 2. March. 

At the first command Nos. 1 and 2, facing to the front, 
{or rear,) apply themselves to the wheels with the hand 
nearest to the piece, the former carrying the sponge, and 
the latter the locking rope in the hand farthest from the 
piece ; the gunner raises the trail. 

At the second command, all step off. At the com- 
mand, Halt, they resume their posts. 

29. When hricoles are to be used^ the shafts attached. 
The instructor commands : 

1. By hricoles to the front {or rear.) 2. March. 

At the first command, Nos. 1 and 2 attach the hooks 
of their bricoles to the washerhooks, and hold the rope 
with the hand nearest to the piece ; the gunner and No. 
3 apply themselves to the shafts ; all facing in the direc- 
tion they are to move. 



168 l^IANUAL FOR LIGHT AUTILLEEY. 

At the second command, all step off. 

At the command, Halt, they resume their posts ; Nos. 
1 and 2 mihooking their bricoles with the hand nearest to 
the piece. 

30. Without bricoles, the shafts attached. The in- 
structor commands : 

1. Forward. 2. March. 

At the first command, the gunner and No. 3 apply 
themselves to the shafts ; Nos. 1 and 2 at the wheels, as 
in No. 28. 

At the second command, all step off. At the com- 
mand, Halt, they resume their posts. 

When the movement requires it, Nos. 4 and 5 carry 
the ammunition chests to their new position. 

No. 3 carries the shafts when they are detached. 



SERVICE OF SEVERAL PIECES. 

31. Forming, and marching the detachments to and 
from the pieces, are executed as in field artillery. 



POSTING AND CHANGING THE POSITION OF DETACHMENTS. 

32. To form the order of march, the detachments 
being in line in front. The instructor commands : 

1. Detachments, to your posts, 2. March. 

At the first command, the chiefs of pieces face the de- 
tachments to the right. At the second, the detachments, 
Nos. 1 and 2 opening out, file to their posts, each member 
halting at his place. The chiefs of pieces face them to the 
front by the command, About Face. 



MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 169 

To form the order of march^ the detachments being in 
line, in rear^ the instructor gives the same commands. 

At the first command, the chiefs of pieces face the de- 
tachments to the left ; at the second, the detachments 
march to their posts ; each number halting as before. 

33. From the order of march, to the front {or rear,) 
The instructor commands : 

1. Detachments front (or rear,) 2. March. 

To the front. At the second- command, repeated by 
the chiefs of pieces, the detachments, No. 3 and the gunner 
closing to the centre when clear of the mule, march to the 
front, file to the left, and are halted, and faced to the front 
by the chiefs of pieces. 

To the rear. At the first command, the chiefs of 
pieces face the detachments about, Nos. 4 and 5 standing 
fast. At the second command, the detachments, Nos. 1 
and 2 closing to the centre as they advance, march to the 
rear, file to the left, are halted and faced to the front by 
the chiefs of pieces. In both cases Nos. 4 and 5 take 
their places on the left, when the detachment is in the 
position ordered. 



HITCHING AND UNHITCHING. 

34. To the front. The instructor commands : 
Hitch to the front. 

At this command, the shafts are attached, (No. 26,) 
and the gunner and No. 3 bring the piece about, each by 
means of the shaft on his own side. 

The mule, passing on the right of the piece, is led by 
its driver to the front and hitched in, the driver backing 
the mule and buckling the breast straps to the staples ; 
8 



170 MANUAL rOK LIGHT ARTILLERY. 

the gunner and No. 3 buckling the thill straps around the 
shafts through the staples, and the breech straps to the 
staples. 

35. To the right (or left.) The instructor commands : 

Hitch to the right {or left.) 

At thiS command the shafts are attached, and turned 
in the proper direction, and the mule, inclining to the right 
or left, is led to its place, and hitched in as before. 

36. To the rear. The instructor commands : 

Hitch to the rear. 

At this command, the shafts are attached, the mule 
brought up, faced about, and hitched in as before. 

37. In hitching in to the front, the carriage and am- 
munition mules, the former first passing the latter, are led 
up to their proper positions. 

In hitching in to the right, (or left,) the mules are, in 
like manner, led up and wheeled to the right or left, at 
the proper intervals. 

In hitching in to the rear, the carriage and ammuni- 
tion mules, following the shaft mule in the order named, 
are led past the piece to their position in the rear. 

For the position of the mules, see No. 3. 

UNHITCHma AND COMTNG INTO ACTION. 

38. To the front. The instructor commands : 

Action Front. 

At this command, the liiule is unhitched, the driver 
unbuckling the breast straps, and the gunner and No. 3 
the breech and thill straps. The driver then leads the 
mule to its place in rear, and the gunner and No. 3, sup- 



MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY* 171 

porting the shafts till the mule is taken out, bring the 
piece about. This done, the shafts are detached and 
placed as above. 

The carriage and ammunition mules are led at once 
to their positions, (see No. 3.) 

39. To the righi^ left^ or rear. The instructor com- 
mands : 

Action right, {left^ or rear,) 

At this command, the mule is unhitched ; the piece 
placed in the required direction ; the shafts detached, and 
each mule led to its proper position. 

In action rear, the carriage and ammunition mules 
pass by the right of the piece to their places in rear. The 
mules face towards the piece as in action front. 

PACKING AND UNPACKING. 

40. The mule unhitched^ and shafts detached. The 
instructor commands : 

1. Prepare to paclc the Piece, 2. Pack the Piece. 

At the first command, the driver leads the shaft mule 
three yards in rear of the piece, the crupper towards the 
trail ; No. 1, after removing the right cap square, takes 
the sponge and inserts the rammer head to the bottom of 
the bore ; and No. 2, after removing the left cap square, 
takes the handspike, and passing one end to No. 3, places 
it under the knob of the cascable, the loop around the 
neck. All face towards the mule and prepare to raise 
the piece. 

At the second command, they raise the piece, No. 1 
inclining slightly to his left to clear the wheel, and place 
it upon the saddle, the trunnions in their beds, the vent 
up, and the cascable towards the head of the mule. No. 1, 



172 MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLEEY. 

then withdrawing the sponge, places it, and the handspike 
which he receives from No. 2, upon the carriage, and goes 
to the shafts. No. 3, with the assistance of No. 2, secures 
the piece firmly to the saddle by means of the lashing 
rope. 

For this purpose he passes one end of the rope (the 
other being fastened to the near hook of the lashing girth) 
over the piece to No. 2, who passes it back beneath the 
transoms, receives it again over the piece, and then fastens 
it, drawing the rope tightly to the off hook of the lashing 
girth. This done. No. 1 turns the shafts round and car- 
ries them near the mule, and Nos, 2 and 3 seizing them 
near the cross-bar, with the assistance of No. 1 acting at 
the ends, raise and place them upon the mule, resting the 
cross-bar upon the cascable, and the shafts upon the arcs ; 
Nos. 2 and 3, the latter first putting the key in its place, 
\:h8n secure the shafts firmly by means of the lashing 
straps. 

PACKING THE CARRIAGE UPON THE MULE. 

41. The instructor commands : 

1. Prepare to pack the Carriage. 2. Pack the Carriage. 

At the first command, the driver leads the carriage 
mule in front of the carriage, and three yards from it, the 
crupper towards the head of the carriage ; the gunner, 
first replacing the cap squares, raises the head of the car- 
riage, and Nos. 4 and 5, at the right and left wheels re- 
spectively, remove the linchpins and washers, take off the 
wheels, and lay them on the ground behind them, the 
larger end of the nave uppermost. This done, Nos. 4 and 
5 replace the linchpins and washers, and seize the arms of 
the axle-tree ; and the gunner, quitting the head of the 



MANUAL FOE LIGHT AKTILLERY. 173 

carriage, seizes the trail ; all face towards the mule, and 
prepare to raise the carriage. 

At the second command, they raise the carriage and 
place it upon the saddle, between the transoms ; the axle- 
tree just in front of the forv/ard arc, the understraps upon 
the arc, and the nuts of the trumiion plate bolts just in 
rear of it. The carriage having been placed. No. 4, with 
the assistance of No. 5, secures it with the lashing cord, 
taking two turns with the cord round the stock and tran- 
soms, and then tying it. This done, they suspend the 
wheels by the fellies, from the arms of the axle-trees ; the 
large end of the nave between the arcs, and resting against 
the leather of the outside bar, and secure them firmly by 
means of the lashing straps. 

The whole is then strongly bound by the lashing rope. 
For this purpose, No. 5, having fastened one end to the 
near hook of the lashing girth, passes the rope up from 
the inside between the nearest convenient felly and spoke, 
and continues it on, pressing it in front of and against the 
outside part of the nave, embracing one or more spokes, 
to the top felly, under which, and over the stock, he passes 
it to No. 4, who, after passing it round a spoke of the off 
wheel, returns it under the transoms of the saddle to No. 
5, by whom it is passed round a spoke and again handed 
over the stock to No. 4. The latter then carries it down 
under the top felly, around the spokes, and against the 
nave, as with the near wheel, to the off hook of the lash- 
ing girth, and then fastens it. 

For greater security, the gunner may tie the fellies of 
the two wheels together, behind the elevating screw, with 
the locking rope. 



174 MANUAL FOR LIGHT AKTILLERY. 

PACKING THE AMMUNITION CHESTS UPON THE MULE. 

42. The instructor commands : 
1. Prepare to pack the Chests, 2. Pack the Chests. 

At the first command, the driver leads the mule from 
the rear to the distance of one yard from the chests, its 
head still facing them ; Nos. 2 and 4 hasten to the chest 
on the right, and Nos. 1 and 5 to that on the left, and 
seize them by the handles ; Nos. 1 and 2 by those in 
front, and Nos. 4 and 5 by those in rear. 

At the second command, they raise the chests, carry 
them to the saddle, and attach the chains to the hooks, the 
chests inclining slightly towards the rear of the mule ; 
Nos. 4 and 5 then secure them with the lashing straps 
and lashing rope. 

This duty might be done with three men, by first hook- 
ing on one chest, and letting one man support it until the 
other is hooked on. 



PACKING the mules AT ONE COMMAND. 

48. The instructor commands : 
Pack the mules. 

At this command, the driver leads the mules to their 
proper positions ; Nos. 1, 2, and 3 proceed to pack the 
piece, and Nos. 4, 5, and the gunner the carriage, as soon 
as the piece is removed. This done, Nos. 1, 2, 4, and 5 
pack the ammunition chests. 

Each cannoneer performs his duty as directed in Nos. 
40, 41, 42. 



MAI^UAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 175 



UNPACKING THE CARRIAGE. 

44. The instructor commands : 

1. Prepare to unpack the Carriage, 2. Unpack the Car- 
riage. 

At the first command, Nos. 4 and 5 unbuckle the lash- 
ing straps, detach the lashing rope, take off the wheels, 
and lay them upon the ground, the large end of the nave 
uppermost. If the locking rope has been used, the gun- 
ner unties and detaches it. Nos. 4 and 5 then untie and 
remove the lashing cord, and facing to the rear, seize 
the arms of the axle-tree ; the gunner facing to the front 
seizes the trail. All prepare to raise the carriage. 

At the second command, they raise the carriage, and 
carry it three yards in rear of the mule ; the gunner then, 
placing the trail upon the ground, seizes the head of the 
carriage and holds it up ; Nos. 4 and 5, removing the 
linchpins and washers, retain them in their hands, put 
on the wheels, and then replace the linchpins and washers. 
The gunner puts up the locking rope, and Nos. 4 and 5 
the lashing rope. 

unpacking the piece. 

45. The instructor commands : 

1. Prepare to unpack the Piece, 2. Unpack the Piece. 

At the first command, the driver leads the mule in 
rear of and three yards from the carriage, the crupper 
towards the trail ; Nos. 2 and 3 unbuckle the lashing 
straps, and, with the assistance of No. 1 acting at the 
ends, disengage the shafts from the saddle ; No. 1 then 
takes hold of them near the cross-bar, turns them round, 



176 MANUAL FOK LIGHT ARTILLEKY. 

and lays them on the ground, in the position described in 
No; 12. This done, Nos. 2 and 3 detach the lashing rope ; 
and No. 1, having taken the sponge and handspike, hands 
the latter to No. 2, and inserts the former into the bore of 
the piece. No. 2 then applies his handspike as in No. 
40 ; when all, facing towards the carriage, prepare to raise 
the piece. 

At the second command, they raise the piece. No. 1 
inclining slightly to his right to clear the wheel, and place 
it upon its carriage. No. 1 puts up the sponge, No. 2 
the handspike, and No. 3 secures the cap squares. 



UNPACKING THE AMMUNITION CHESTS. 

46. The instructor commands : 

1. Prepare to unpack the Chests. 2. Unpack the Chests. 

At the first command, Nos. 2 and 4 seize the handles 
of the right chest, and Nos. 1 and 5 those of the left ; 
Nos. 4 and 5 having first unbuckled the lashing straps, 
and detached the lashing rope. 

At the second command, they raise the chests, unhook 
them, and lay them on the ground one yard from the 
mule. 

UNPACKING THE MULES AT ONE COMMAND. 

47. The instructor commands : 

Unpack the mules. 

At this command, the drivers place the shaft and car- 
riage mules eight yards apart, the crupper towards the 
place the piece is to occupy ; the gunner, and Nos, 4 and 
5 proceed to unpack the carriage, and Nos. 1, 2, and 3 



MANUAL FOK LIGHT ARTILLERY. 177 

the piece. The sponge and handspike are not taken from 
the carriage until it is on the ground, nor is the piece 
taken from the saddle until the carriage is mounted on its 
wheels. Each cannoneer performs his duty as directed 
in Nos. 44 and 45. 

If the ammunition chests are to be unpacked, it is 
done as soon as the piece is mounted, as prescribed in 
No. 46. 



ft» 



CHAPTER XII. 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 

SERVICE OF THE PIECE. 

1. The manner of serving heavy artillery varies with 
the kind of piece, and the carriage upon which it is 
mounted. 

2. There are four kinds of heavy pieces in the land 
service, viz. : the Gun, the Howitzer, the Mortar, and 

the COLUMBIAD. 

They are distinguished according to their use, as siege, 
garrison, and sea-coast artillery. 

For their service six distinct kinds of carriages are 
necessary, viz. : the siege, the barbette, the casemate^ the 
fla7ik-casemate, the columbiad, and the carriage upon 
which the Mortar is mounted, which is technically called 
its bed. 

Siege artillery is used in the attack of places ; and as 
it follows armies in their operations, is mounted upon car- 
riages which serve for its transportation. 

Garrison artillery is employed in the defence of forts, 
more especially those of the interior ; and sea-coast artil- 
lery, consisting of the heaviest calibres, is used for the 
defence of the sea-coast. Their carriages do not subserve 
the purpose of transportation ; the barbette carriage may, 



MAITUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 



It9 



however, be used for moving its piece for short distances, 
as from one front of a work to another. 

The following are the kinds and calibres of Heavy 
Artillery used in the land service of the United States : 



Kind of Ordnance. 



Guns. 



Howitzers, 
columbiads. 



Mortars. 



Siege and Garrison. 



Sea-coast. 

Siep;e and Garrison, 



^{ 



Sea-coast. 



Siege. 

Sea-coast. 

Stone. 
Coehorn. 



Calibre. 



12-pdr. 
18-pdr. 
24-pdr. 
32-pdr. 
42-pdr. 
8-inch. 
24-pdr. 

8 -inch. 
10-inch. 

8-inch. 
10-inch. 

8-inch. 
10-inch. 
10-inch. 
13-inch. 
16-inch. 
24-pdr. 



Material. 



Iron. 



!• Bronze. 



3. The detachment for serving a piece is formed in 
two ranks, and numbered from right to left. The odd 
numbers form the rear rank, and serve on the right of 
the piece ; the even numbers and the gunner form the 
front rank, and serve on its left. The right file is num- 
bered 1 and 2 ; the next file 3 and 4 ; the gunner is un- 
covered, and generally on the left of No. 4 ; and on his 
left are as many files as are deemed necessary, numbered 
5 and 6, 7 and 8, etc. 

4. A piece is in battery when it is in the proper po- 
sition to be fired. 

The right of a piece, when in battery, is the right of 
the cannoneer when facing to the object to be fired at ; 



180 MANUAL FOR HEAVY AJRTILLERr. 

the front is the direction towards which the muzzle 
points. 

The term battery is applied to one or more pieces, or 
to the places where the pieces are fired. 

A platform is the support upon which a piece is ma- 
noeuvred when in batterj. 

5. The detachment is marched to the battery by a 
flank. It is halted, and faced to the front, w^hen its centre 
is opposite to the middle of the platform, and (if there be 
room) four yards from it. 

6. To cause the cannoneers to take their posts, the 
instructor commands : 

1. DetacMnent, to your posts, 2. March. 

At the first command, the detachment is faced to the 
right by the chief of piece. 

At the second command, it files to the left, and the 
two flanks separate ; the rear rank marching to the right 
of the pi ece, and the front rank to the left, in lines parallel 
to its axis. As each man arrives at his post, he halts 
and faces to the piece ; Nos. 1 and 2 one yard from the 
epaulment, parapet, or scarp, their breasts eighteen inches 
outside of the wheels of the carriage or cheeks of the 
mortar bed, as the case may be ; and the other numbers 
and the gunner, dressing on Nos. 1 and 2 respectively at 
intervals of one yard, except that between Nos. 3 and 5 
there is an interval of two yards. With the mortar, 
Nos. 1 and 2 are opposite to the front manoeuvring bolts, 
and Nos. 3 and 4 opposite to those in the rear. 

Under the fire of the enemy ^ the men will be directed 
to cover themselves by the parapet as much as may be 
consistent with the execution of their duties. 

7. The chief of piece (a non-commissioned officer) 
assists the instructor in effecting a correct execution of 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 181 

the movements. While at the battery, he will generally 
be one yard outside of the cannoneers of the left, facing 
the piece, and two yards in rear of the platform or rear- 
most part of the carriage. He communicates and attends 
to the execution of all orders he may receive in relation 
to the service of his piece ; as, for instance, the kind of 
ammunition to be used, the weight of charge, the kind 
and length of fuze, etc. 

8. The movements of the cannoneers at the battery 
are in double-quick time, 

9. Posts are changed at the discretion of the in- 
structor. 

10. To allow the detachment to rest, the instructor 
commands : 

In place. Rest; or, Rest. 

The cannoneers lay down their handspikes. 

In the first case, the men remain at their posts ; in 
the second case, they may leave their posts, but will re- 
main near the piece. 

To resume the exercise, the instructor commands : 

Attention — Detachment. 

At which command, all resume their posts and hand- 
spikes. 

11. Until the cannoneer becomes well versed in his 
duties at the piece, the instructor will himself, by way of 
example, occasionally execute the movements which he 
orders. In the intervals of rest he will minutely instruct 
the men in the names and uses of the implements, and in 
the nomenclatures of the piece, its carriage or bed, and 
of the parts of the fortification near the battery. In the 
course of the instruction, he will require every man to 
point out and designate by name all the parts enumerated 
in these nomenclatures, and to answer questions relative 



182 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 

to the service of the piece ; such as the weight of charge, 
the manner of making cartridges and wads, of heating 
shot and throwing hot shot, of laying platforms, pointing, 
etc. And although he is to consider precision of move- 
ment as highly essential, yet he is to inculcate that some- 
thing more is necessary than a merely mechanical per- 
formance of duty. He will, therefore, endeavor to im- 
press upon the cannoneer not only the habit of a soldier- 
like manner of working his gun, but an accurate under- 
standing of all the elements necessary to the efficiency of 
its fire. 

12. To leave the battery, the instructor commands : 

1. Detachment^ rear, 2. March. 

At the first command, the detachment is faced from 
the epaulment by the chief of piece. 

At the second command, it marches to the rear — the 
cannoneers of the left closing upon those of the right — 
files to the right, and is halted and faced to the front by 
the chief of piece, so as to bring its centre opposite to 
the middle of the platform, and four yards from it. The 
chief of piece places himself upon the right. 

The detachment is marched from the battery by a 
flank. 



LESSON I. 

Sermce of a Gun mounted on a siege carriage. 

Seven men are necessary ; one gunner and six other 
cannoneers. 

13. The piece is in battery upon its platform. 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY AETILLEKY. 



183 



Handspikes, 



Sponge Rammer, < 



The implements, etc., are arranged as follows : 

r Three on each side of the carriage lean^ 
^ ing against the epaulment, in line 
L with the cannoneers. 
One yard behind and parallel to the 
line of camioneers of the right, the 
sponge uppermost, the sponge and 
rammer-heads turned from the epaul- 
ment, and supported upon a prop. 
Against the epaulment, outside of the 
pile of balls. 
'' Containing friction tubes, and the lan- 
yard, which is habitually wound in 
the form of St. Andrew's cross upon 
its handle. Suspended from the 
knob of the cascable. 
Containing the gunner's level, breech 
sight, fingerstall, priming wire, gim- 
let, vent-punch, and chalk. Sus- 
pended from the knob of the cascable. 
One on each side of the piece, near 

the ends of the hm-ter. 
Covering the vent. 
In the muzzle. 

Leaning against the epaulment, out- 
side of the pile of balls. 
When several guns are served together, there will be 
only one gunner's level and two vent-punches to each 
battery, not exceeding six pieces. To the same battery 
there will be one worm^ one ladle, and one wrench. 

The balls are regularly piled on the left of the piece, 
near the epaulment, and close to the edge of the plat- 
form. 



Pass-box, 



Tube-pouch, . { 



Gunner's-pouch, 

Chocks, . . . 

Vent-cover, 
Tompion, . . 

Broom, . . . 



184 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 

The wads are placed between the epaulment and the 
balls, partly resting on them. 

14. The cannoneers having been marched to their 
posts, the instructor directs them to place their muskets 
against the epaulment, and then explains to them the 
names and uses of the implements, and the nomenclatures 
of the gun, its carriage and the battery. 

15. To cause the implements to be distributed, the in- 
structor commands : 

Take Implements. 

The gunner steps to the knob of the cascable ; takes 
off the vent-cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the 
epaulment, outside of the pass-box ; gives the tube-pouch 
to No. 3 ; equips himself with his own pouch and the 
fiugerstall, wearing the latter on the second finger of the 
left hand ; levels the piece by the elevating screw ; ap- 
plies his level to ascertain the highest points of the base- 
ring and swell of the muzzle, which he marks with chalk, 
and resumes his post. 

No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch. 

Nos. 1 and 2, after passing two handspikes" each to 
Nos. 3 and 4, take each one for himself. Nos. 5 and 6 
receive theirs from Nos. 3 and 4 

16. The handspike is held in both hands ; the hand 
nearest to the epaulment grasping it near the small end 
and at the height of the shoulder, back of the hand down, 
the arm extended naturally ; the butt of the handspike 
upon the platform on the side farthest from the epaul- 
ment, and six inches in advance of the alignment. 

17. When the cannoneer lays down his handspike, he 
places it directly before him, about six inches in ad- 
vance of and parallel to the alignment, the small end 
towards the epaulment ; and whenever he thus lays it 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 185 

down for the discharge of any particular duty, he will re- 
sume it on returning to his post after the completion of 
that duty. 

18. The instructor causes the service of the piece to 
be executed by the following commands : 

1. From Battery. 

The gunner moves two paces to his right. 

Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, facing from the epaulment, 
unbar; Nos. 1 and 2 under the front of the wheels; 
Nos . 3 and 4 through the rear spokes of the wheels near 
the felly, under and perpendicularly to the cheeks ; and 
Nos. 5 and 6 under the manoeuvring bolts. 

All being ready, the gunner gives the command 
Heave, which will be repeated as often as may be neces- 
sary. He sees Nos. 5 and 6 guide the trail in prolonga- 
tion of the directrix of the embrasure, and as soon as the 
face of the piece is about one yard from the epaulment, 
commands Halt. All unbar, and resume ^their posts, 
Nos. 1 and 2 chock the wheels. 

2. Load by Detail. Load. 

19. Nos. 1, 2 and 4 lay down their handspikes. 

No. 2 takes out the tompion, and places it near th« 
vent-cover. 

No. 1 faces once and a half to his left ; steps over the 
sponge and rammer ; faces to the piece ; takes the sponge 
with both hands, the back down, the right hand three feet 
from the sponge head, the left hand eighteen inches nearer 
to it, returns to the piece, entering the staff in the em- 
brasure ; places the left foot in line with the face of the 
piece, half way between it and the wheels ; breaks to the 
right with the right foot, the heels on a line parallel to 
the direction of the piece, the left leg straightened, the 



186 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 

right knee bent, the body erect i\pon the haunches ; and 
rests the end of the sponge in the muzzle, the staff in the 
prolongation of the bore, supported by the right hand, the 
right arm extended, the left hand flat against the side of 
the thigh. 

No. 3 steps to the muzzle, and occupies a position on 
the left of the piece corresponding to that of No. 1 on its 
right. He seizes the staff with the left hand, back down, 
near to and outside of the hand of No. 1. 

No. 2, facing towards the epaulment, embars under 
the breech, and maintains the piece in a convenient po- 
sition for inserting the sponge, until he receives a signal 
from the gunner to unbar. He then lays down his hand- 
spike ; steps over the rammer, and seizes the staff with' 
both hands, as prescribed for the sponge; and stands 
ready to exchange with No. 1. 

No. 4 takes the pass-box and goes to the rear for a 
cartridge ; returns with it, and p.laces himself, facing the 
piece, about eighteen inches to the rear and right of 
No. 2. 

The gunner places himself near the stock, the left foot 
advanced, closes the vent with the second finger of the 
left hand, bending well forward to cover himself by the 
breech ; turns the elevating screw with the right hand, so 
as to adjust the piece conveniently for loading : and 
makes a signal for No. 3 to unbar. 

20. In the mean time Nos. 1 and 2 insert the sponge 
by the following motions : 

First motion, — They insert the sponge as far as the 
hand of No. 1, bodies erect, shoulders square. 

Second motion. — They slide the hand along the staff, 
and seize it at arm's length. 

Thira motion. — ^They force the sponge down as pre- 
scribed in the first motion. 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY AETILLERIT. 187 

Fourth motion, — They repeat the second motion. 

Fifth motion, — They push the sponge to the bottom 
of the bore. No. 1 replaces the left hand on the staff, 
back up, six inches nearer to the muzzle than the right. 
No. 2 places the right hand, back up, between the hands 
of No. 1. 

If in executing these motions, or the corresponding 
ones with the rammer, it be found that the sponge or 
rammer is at home at the third or fourth motion, then 
what is prescribed for the fifth motion will be performed 
at the third or fourth. The knee on the side towards 
which the body is to be inclined is always bent, the other 
straightened ; and the weight of the body added, as much 
as possible, to the effort exerted by the arms. 

3. Sponge. 

21. Nos. 1 and 2, pressing the sponge firmly against 
the bottom of the bore, turn it three times from right to 
left, and three times from left to right ; replace the hands 
on the thighs ; and withdraw the sponge by motions con- 
trary to those prescribed for inserting it. 

Remark, — ^To handle the sponge when it is new and fits tight, 
it may become necessary for Nos. 1 and 2 to use both hands. In 
this case it will be inserted and withdrawn by short and quick 
motions. 

No. 2 quits the staff, and turning towards No 4, re* 
ceives from him the cartridge, which he takes in both 
hands, back down, and introduces into the bore bottom 
foremost, seams to the sides ; he then grasps the rammer 
in the way prescribed for the sponge. 

No. 1, rising upon the right leg and turning towards 
his left, passes the sponge above the rammer with the left 
hand to No. 3, and receiving the rammer with the right, 
presents it as prescribed for the sponge, except that he 



188 MAmJAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 

rests the rammer-head against the right side of the face 
of the piece. 

No. 3, as soon as the sponge is withdrawn, passing 
the rammer under the sponge into the embrasure with 
the right hand, receives the sponge from No. 1 with the 
left, replaces it upon the prop, and resumes his post. 

No. 4, setting down the pass-box, takes out the car- 
tridge and presents it in both hands to No. 2, the choke 
to the front ; returns the pass-box to its place ; and 
picks up a ball, and afterwards a wad, should one be re- 
quired. 

Nos. 1 and 2 force down the cartridge by the motions 
prescribed for forcing down the sponge. 

4. Ram. 

22. Nos. 1 and 2, drawing the rammer out to the full 
extent of their arms, ram with a single stroke. No. 2 
quits the staff, and turning towards No. 4, receives from 
him the ball and wad, whilst No. 1 throws out the ram- 
mer, and holds the head against the right side of the face 
of the piece. No. 2, receiving successively the ball and 
wad, introduces them into the bore, the ball first, and 
seizes the staff with the left hand. No. 4 then resumes 
his post. 

Nos. 1 and 2 force down the ball and wad together 
by the same motions, and ram in the same manner as 
prescribed for the cartridge. No, 2 quits the rammer ; 
sweeps, if necessary, the platform on his own side ; passes 
the broom to No. 1 ; and resumes his post. No. 1 
throws out the rammer, and places it upon the prop below 
the sponge ; finishes the sweeping, and resumes his post. 

The gunner pricks, leaving the priming wire in the 
vent ; resumes his post ; and, if firing beyond point-blank 
range, adjusts the breech-sight to the distance. 



MATq TTAT. FOR HEAVY AETILLEEY. 189 

5. In Battery. 

23. Nos. 1 and 2 iinchock the wheels, and with Nos. 
3, 4, 5, and 6, all facing towards the epaulment, embar ; 
Nos. 1 and 2 through the front spokes of the wheels near 
the felly, under and perpendicularly to the cheeks ; Nos. 
3 and 4 under the rear of the wheels ; and Nos. 5 and 6 
under the manoeuvring bolts perpendicularly to the stock. 

All being ready, the gunner commands Heave, and 
the piece is run into battery ; Nos. 5 and 6 being careful 
to guide the chase into the middle of the embrasure. As 
soon as the wheels touch the hurter, he commands Halt. 
All unbar, and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 resume their posts. 

6. Point. 

24. No. 3 lays down his handspike, passes the hook 
of the lanyard through the eye of a tube from front to 
rear, and holds the handle of the lanyard with the right 
hand, the hook between the thumb and forefinger. 

Nos. 5 and 6 embar under and perpendicularly to the 
trail, near the manoeuvring bolts. 

The gunner, placing himself at the stock, as at the 
command Load, withdraws the priming-wire, and, aided 
by Nos. 5 and. 6, gives the direction, causing the trail to 
be moved by commanding Left, or Right, tapping at the 
same time on the right side of the breech for No. 5 to 
move the trail to the left, or on the left side for No. 6 to 
move it to the right. 

He then places the centre point of the breech-sight ac- 
curately upon the chalk mark on the base-ring, and by 
the elevating screw gives the proper elevation, rectifying 
the direction, if necessary. 

The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises 
on the left leg, and gives the word Ready, making a sig- 
nal with both hands, at which Nos. 5 and 6 unbar, and 



190 , MAISruAL FOR HEAVY ARllLLEBY. 

resume their posts ; takes the breech-sight with the left 
hand, and goes to the windward to observe the effect of 
the shot. 

No. 3 inserts the tube in the vent, drops the handle, 
allowing the lanyard to uncoil as he steps back to his 
post, holding it slightly stretched with the right hand, the 
cord passing between the fingers, back of the hand up ; 
and breaks to the rear a full pace with the left foot, the 
left hand against the thigh. 

At the word Ready, Nos. 1 and 2 take the chocks, 
and breaking off with the feet furthest from the epaul- 
ment, stand ready to chock the wheels. 

25. In directing the piece to be fired, the instructor 
will designate it by its number, as, for example : 

7. Number one — Fire. 

No. 3 gives a smart pull upon the lanyard. 

Immediately after the discharge of the piece, Nos. 1 
and 2 chock the wheels, and resume the erect position. 
No. 3 resumes the erect position, and rewinds the lanyard 
in St. Andrew's cross upon its handle, returning it if dry 
to the tube-pouch. The gunner, having observed the effect 
of the shot, returns to his post. 

26. Whenever the piece is to be fired by a locJc^ port- 
fire, or slow-match, it will be done by No. 3, as prescribed 
for No. 4, in the instruction for field artillery. 

27. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes 
the series of commands, beginning with From Battery. 

TO CHANGE POSTS* 

28. To change posts the instructor commands : 
1. Change Posts. 2. March. 3. Call Off. 

At the first command, the cannoneers lay down their 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 191 

handspikes ; place their equipments on the parts of the 
carriage nearest to them ; and face to their left. 

At the second command, they step off, each advancing 
one post ; No. 2 taking that of No. 1. Nos. 2 and 5 pass 
to the rear of the trail ; No. 2 on the outside of all the 
cannoneers. On arriving at their posts, they face to the 
piece, and equip themselves. 

At the third command, they call off, according to th© 
posts they are to occupy. 



TO LOAD FOR ACTION. 

29. The cannoneers having been sufficiently instructed 
in the details of the movements, the instructor com- 
mands : 

Load for action — Load. 

The piece is run from battery, loaded, run into bat- 
tery, pointed, and prepared for firing, by the following 
commands from the gunner : From Battery — Load — In 
Battery — Point — Ready. 

At the command or signal from the instructor to com- 
mence firing, the gunner gives the command Fire, and 
continues the action until the instructor directs the fu-ing 
to cease. 

to cease firing. 

30. To cause the firing to cease, the instructor com- 
mands : 

Cease Firing. 

Whether the cannoneers are loading by detail or for 
action, the piece is sponged out, and all resume their 
posts. If the cartridge has been inserted, the loading will 



192 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 

be completed, unless the instructor should otherwise 
direct. 

TO SECURE PIECE, AND REPLACE IMPLEMENTS. 

31. To discontinue the exercise, the instructor having 
ordered the firing to cease, and caused the piece to be run 
into battery, gives the following commands : 

1. Secure Piece. 

No. 2 returns the tompion to the muzzle, the gunner 
puts on the vent-cover, which he receives from No. 2, and 
depresses the piece. 

2. Replace Implements. 

Nos. 1 and 2 replace the handspikes against the epaul- 
ment, those of Nos. 3, 4, 5 and 6 being passed to them 
by Nos. 3 and 4 for that purpose. The gunner hangs 
the pouches upon the knob of the cascable. 



to leave the battery. 

32. The instructor causes the muskets to be taken ; 
forms the detachment in rear of the piece ; and marches 
it from the battery as prescribed in No. 12. 

33. Remarks, — The service of a 24-pdr. siege gun, as 
it respects running from and to battery, and pointing, is 
performed by five men, as prescribed for the siege 
howitzer. Five men suffice for the service of the 18 and 
12-pdrs. To perform, however, all the duties incident to 
a battery of heavy artillery on a war establishment, in- 
cluding transportation and the mechanical manoeuvres, 
the details for its daily service, at three reliefs, should 
allow at least twenty privates to each piece. 



MANUAL FOK HEAVY AETILLER-ST. 193 



TO SERVE THE PIECE WITH REDUCED NUMBERS. 

34. The smallest number of men with which heavy 
pieces can be served with facility, has been given as five. 
It may be necessary, however, from the men being dis- 
abled, or from other circumstances, to serve a gun with a 
less number. 

With four men. — ^They will be told off as gunner, 
and Nos. 1, 2, and 3. In this case No. 2 will, in addition 
to his own duties, perform those of No. 4. 

With three men. — They will be told off as gunner, and 
Nos. 1 and 2. No. 1 performs the duties prescribed for 
No. 3, as well as his own. No. 2 performs those of No. 
4, as in the preceding case. 

When No. 2 serves ammunition, he goes for the car- 
tridge, and places the pass-box behind his post, before as- 
sisting No. 1 to sponge. 



TRANSPORTATION. 

35. The transportation of a 24-pdr. gun requires ten 
horses and five drivers ; an 18-pdr. eight horses and four 
drivers ; a battery wagon six horses and three drivers ; 
and spare carriages — at the rate of one for every five 
pieces — require each six horses and three drivers. 



CHARGES, ETC. 

36. The ordinary service charge of powder for heavy 
guns is one-fourth the weight of the shot. For firing 
double shot it is one-sixth that weight. The breaching 
charge is one- third the weight of the shot. 



19i MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 

Range of a 24-pdr., at an angle of 1° 30', (^point blank,) 

charge 6 lbs 950 yards. 

Range of a 24-pdr., at an angle of 5°, charge 6 lbs 1900 " 

Range of an 18-pdr., at an angle of 1° 30', charge 4^ lbs. 800 *' 

Range of an 18-pdr., at an angle of 5°, charge 4i lbs... 1600 " 

Proof range of powder 300 " 

The range of a 12-pdr. is about the same as that of an 
18-pdr. 

Greatest elevation that a 24-pdr. carriage admits 12° 

Greatest elevation that an 18-pdr. carriage admits 12° 

Greatest elevation that a 12-pdr. carriage admits 13° 

Greatest depression that a 24-pdr. carriage admits 4° 

Greatest depression that an 18-pdr. carriage admits 4° 

Greatest depression that a 12-pdr. carriage admits 4° 



WADS. 

37. Wads are not generally necessary, except when 
firing at angles of depression ; and then only one is used, 
and that on the ball. When, however, the piece has been 
fired so often that the ball has caused a lodgment in the 
bore, it is well to use wads differing in length, according 
to the position and extent of the lodgment, between the 
shot and the cartridge. 

ffai/ wads may be made by twisting hay into a rope 
of about one inch in diameter, folding it together of any 
desired length, and then winding the folds from one end 
to the other, leaving the wad a little larger than the bore. 

BREACHING BATTERIES. 

38. Breaching batteries established against walls are, 
First, To make a horizontal section the length of the 

desired breach along the scarp, at one-third its height from 
the bottom of the ditch, and to a depth equal to the thick- 
ness of the wall. 



MAJSrUAL FOK HEAVY ARTILLERY. 195 

Secondly. To make vertical cuts through the wall, not 
further than ten yards apart, and not exceeding one to 
each piece ; beginning at the horizontal section, and as- 
cending gradually to the top of the wall. 

Thirdly, To fire at the most prominent points of the 
masonry left standing ; beginning always at the bottom, 
and gradually approaching to the top. 

Fourthly, To fire into the broken mass with howitzers 
until the breach is practicable. 

Breaches of more than twenty yards in length have 
been opened by way of experiment, and rendered prac- 
ticable, in less than ten hours, by about two hundred and 
thirty 24-pdr. balls and forty shells in one case, and by 
three hundred 18-pdr. balls and forty shells in another. 

RAPIDITY OF FIRING. 

39. Iron guns sustain long-continiied and rapid firing 
better than brass guns. An iron gun should sustain 
twelve hundred discharges, at the rate of twelve an hour ; 
but whatever may be the rate of fire, it is deemed unsafe 
after that number of discharges. As many as twenty an 
hour have been made for sixteen consecutive hours. 

PENETRATION OF SHOT. 

40. The penetration of balls increases to a certain ex- 
tent with their calibre. The mean result,. from several 
experiments, gives the penetration of a 24-pdr. ball, with 
the charge of one-third its weight, at the distance of one 
hundred yards, as follows : 

Feet. Indies. 

In earth of old parapets 8 6 

In earth recently thrown up 15 

In oak wood, sound and hard 4 6 

In rubble stone and masonry 1 10 

In brick 3 



196 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY AETILLERY. 



LESSON II. 



Sertice of an %-inch Siege Hoioitzer^ mounted on a 24:'pdr, 
Siege Carriage, 

Five men are necessary : one gunner and four other 
cannoneers. 

41. The piece is in battery upon its platform. 
The implements, etc., are arranged as follows : 

Three on the left of the carriage, and 
two on the right, leaning against the 
epaulment, in line with the cannon- 
eers. 



Handspikes, 



Sponge & Ram- 
mer, . . 



Haversack, 



< 



TuBE-POUCH, 



Gunner's-pouch, < 



On props, eighteen inches behind ana 
parallel to the cannoneers of the 
right, the sponge-head turned to- 
wards the epaulment. 

Containing fuzes, a pair of sleeves, and 
a priming-wire, bent at right angles 
at the point for withdrawing the 
cartridge used in instruction. - Sus- 
pended from the knob of the cas- 
cable. 

Containing friction tubes, and the lan- 
yard, wound in St. Andrew's cross 
upon its handle. Suspended from 
the knob of the cascable. 

Containing the gunner's level, breech- 
sight, finger-stall, priming-wire, gim- 
let, vent-punch, and chalk. Sus- 
pended from the knob of the cas- 
cable. 



MANUAL FOK HEAVY ABTILLEKY. 



197 



loadino-tongs^ 
Quadrant, 
Plummet, . 
Scraper, 
Wiper, . . 
Splints, . . 
Grummet-wad, 

Chocks, . . 



Vent-cover, 

TOMPION, 

Quoin, . . 
Broom, . . 



In a basket or on a shelf, against the 
epaulment, outside of and near the 
handspikes of the left. 



On the end of the hurter, near No. 2. 
j One on each side of the piece, near the 
( ends of the hurter. 
Covering the vent. 
In the muzzle. 
Under the breech, 
j Leaning against the epaulment, outside 
( of the basket or shelf. 
When several howitzers are served together, there 
will be only one gunner's level and two vent-punches to 
each battery, not exceeding six pieces. To the same bat- 
tery there will be one wrench. 

One shell and one bombazine cartridge bag for in- 
struction — the bag filled with sawdust, and having loops 
of thread at the choke end — are at the magazine, or other 
safe place in rear of the piece. 

42. The cannoneers having been marched to their 
posts, the instructor directs them to place their muskets 
against the epaulment, and then explains to them the 
names and uses of the implements, and the nomenclatures 
of the howitzer, its carriage, and the battery. 

43. To cause the implements to be distributed, the 
instructor commands : 

Take Implements. 

The gunner steps to the knob of the cascable ; takes 
off the vent-cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the 
epaulment, outside of the basket ; gives the tube-pouch to 



198 MANUAL FOR HEAVY AKTILLERY. 

No. 3, and the haversack to No. 4 ; and equips himself 
with his own pouch and the finger-stall, wearing the lat- 
ter on the second finger of the left hand. 

No. 2 puts on the sleeves. 

No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch. 

No. 4 equips himself with the haversack, which he 
wears from the right shoulder to the left side ; takes out 
the sleeves ; and assists No. 2 to put them on. 

Nos. 1 and 2, after passing handspikes to Nos. 3 and 
4 and the gunner, take each one for himself. The gunner, 
receiving his from No. 4, lays it in the allignment, the 
small end towards the epaulment, and two yards to his 
right. The other handspikes are held, laid down, and re- 
sumed, as prescribed in Nos. 15 and 16. 

The gunner directs No. 3 to raise the breech to enable 
him to level the piece ; applies his level to ascertain the 
highest points of the base-ring and muzzle-band, which he 
marks with chalk ; and resumes his post. 

44. The instructor causes the service of the piece to 
be executed by the following commands : 

1. From Battery. 

The gunner moves two paces to his right. 

Nos. 1,2, 3, and 4, facing from the epaulment, embar : 
Nos. 1 and 2 through the rear spokes of the wheels, near 
the felly, under and perpendicularly to the cheeks ; and 
Nos. 3 and 4 under the mana3uvring bolts. 

All being ready, the gunner gives the command 
Heave, which will be repeated as often as may be neces- 
sary. He sees that Nos. 3 and 4 gtiide the trail in pro- 
longation of the directrix of the embrasure, and as soon 
as the wheels are about one yard from the epaulment, 
commands Halt. All unbar, and resume their posts. 
Nos. 1 and 2 chock the wheels. 



MANUAL FOK HEAVY ARTILLERY. 199 

2. Load hy detail — Load. 

45. Nos. 1, 2, and 4 lay down their handspikes. 

No. 2 takes out the tompion, and places it near the 
vent-cover ; sweeps, if necessary, his side of the platform ; 
passes the broom tg the right side of the piece ; and re- 
sumes his post. 

No. 1 faces to his right, and seizes the sponge-staff at 
its middle with the right hand, back up ; places himself 
at the muzzle ; forces the sponge to the bottom of the 
chamber ; and grasps the staff with both hands ; all nearly 
as in field artillery. 

No. 3, facing towards the epaulment, embars under 
the breech or knob of the cascable, until he receives a sig- 
nal from the gunner to unbar, when he resumes his post. 

No. 4 goes to the rear for a cartridge and shell ; puts 
the cartridge in his haversack ; takes the shell in both 
hands ; returns and places it on the grummet-wad ; and 
stands, facing the piece, about eighteen inches to the rear 
and left of No. 2. 

The gunner places himself near the stock, as in No. 
18, and closes the vent with the second finger of the left 
hand ; adjusts the piece wath the quoin to about one de- 
gree's elevation ; and makes a sign for No. 3 to unbar. 

3. Sponge. 

46. No. 1, pressing the sponge firmly against the bot- 
tom of the chamber, turns it three times from right to 
left, and three times from left to right ; draws it out to 
the front of the chamber ; wipes out the bore ; reinserts 
the sponge along the upper side of the bore as far as the 
chamber ; draws it entirely out, pressing it upon the 
lower side of the bore ; turns the sponge over towards 
the embrasure ; and presents the rammer-head against 



200 MAJ^^AL FOK HEAVY ARTILLERY. 

the right side of the face of the piece, holding the staff in 
both hands. 

No. 2, as soon as the sponging is completed, takes the 
tongs and occupies a position at the muzzle corresponding 
to that prescribed for No. 1 on the right ; turns to his 
left on the right heel, advancing the l^t foot, and presents 
the tongs in both hands, the left hand nearest him, the 
tongs opened, their legs in the same vertical plane. 

No. 4 takes out the cartridge and inserts it as far as 
its middle in the tongs, choke foremost, the seam down- 
wards ; removes the stopper from, and inserts the fuze 
into, the fuze plug ; scrapes its end ; and takes the wiper. 

No. 2, having received the cartridge in the tongs, 
makes a face and a half to his right on the right heel, and 
breaks off with the left foot ; places the right hand against 
the head of the left cheek of the carriage, and with the 
left hand introduces the cartridge into the chamber, keep- 
ing the legs of the tongs in a vertical plane ; then slightly 
withdrawing and closing the tongs, he presses them in the 
direction of the axis of the piece against the end of the 
cartridge, and shoves it home. Withdrawing the tongs, 
he makes a face and a half to his left on the right heel, 
and puts the hooks of the tongs into the ears of the shell, 
which he lifts and holds about two feet from the ground, 
whilst No. 4 wipes it. 

No. 1, as soon as the tongs are withdrawn, inserts the 
rammer, and holds it with the head against the cartridge, 
the staff in the axis of the piece. 

4. Ram. 

47. No. 1 presses firmly upon the cartridge ; throws 
out the rammer, and places it upon the props ; sweeps, 
if necessary, his side of the platform ; passes the broom 
to the left side of the piece ; and resumes his post. 



MANUAL FOE HEAVY ARTILLERY. 201 

No. 2 introduces the shell, and shoves it home in a 
manner similar to that prescribed for the cartridge ; with- 
draws the hooks, and looks to see that the fuze is in the 
axis of the piece. 

If the piece is to be fired horizontally, or at an angle 
of depression, No. 4, having replaced the wiper, hands a 
splint to No. 2, and resumes his post. 

No. 2 presses the splint under the shell with the left 
hand ; replaces the tongs and broom ; and resumes his 
post. 

The gunner pricks, leaving the priming-wire in the 
vent, and resumes his post. 

5. I]^ Battery. 

48. Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the wheels, and with Nos. 
3 and 4, all facing towards the epaulment, embar : Nos. 1 
and 2 through the front spokes of the wheels, near the 
felly, under and perpendicularly to the cheeks ; and Nos. 
3 and 4 under the rear of the wheels. 

The gunner, seizing his handspike, em"bars under the 
manoeuvring bolts ; gives the command Heave ; and 
guides the piece to the middle of the embrasure ; as soon 
as the wheels touch the hurter, he commands Halt. All 
unbar, and resume their posts. 

6. Point. 

49. Nos. 1 and 4 embar under and perpendicularly to 
the trail, near the manoeuvring bolts. 

No. 2, facing towards the epaulment, embars under 
the breech or knob of the cascable. 

No. 3 lays down his handspike ; passes the hook of 
the lanyard through the eye of a tube from front to rear ; 
and holds the handle of the lanyard with the right hand, 
the hook between the thumb and forefinger. 
9^ 



202 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 

The gunner, placing himself at the stock, as at the 
command Load, withdraws the priming-wire, and, aided 
by Nos. 1 and 4, gives the direction ; causing the trail to 
be moved by commanding Left, or Eight, tapping, at the 
same time, on the right side of the breech for No. 1 to 
move the trail to the left, or on the left side of No. 4 to 
move it to the right. 

He then places the centre point of the breech-sight aa 
curately upon the chalk mark on the base-ring, and com. 
mands Lower, or Raise, tapping, at the same time, on 
the upper side of the knob of the cascable with the left 
hand, and drawing out the quoin with the right, in order 
to elevate, or tapping upwards on the lower side, and 
shoving in the quoin, in order to depress the piece ; rec- 
tifying the direction, if necessary. 

If the piece is to be fired point-blank, horizontally, or 
at an angle of depression, he does not apply the breech- 
sight. 

If the piece is masked from the object fired at, he 
places himself astride the stock, or in rear of the trail, and 
gives the direction by the plummet. 

To give the elevation when the piece is masked, or 
Avhen the desired range is greater than the breech-sight 
ranges, he applies the quadrant to the upper surface of 
the lock-piece, making the allow^ance due to its inclination 
w^ith the axis of the piece, which ought to be previously 
determined. 

The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises 
on the left leg, and gives the word Ready, making a sig- 
nal w^ith both hands, at which Nos. 1, 2, and 4 unbar, and 
resume their posts ; takes the breech-sight with the left 
hand, and goes to the windw^ard to observe the effect of 
the shot. 

No. 3 inserts the tube in the vent ; drops the handle, 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 203 

allowing the lanyard to uncoil as he steps back to his 
post, holding it slightly stretched with the right hand, the 
cord passing bet^veen the fingers, back of the hand up ; 
and breaks to the rear a full pace v/ith the left foot, the 
left hand against the thigh. 

Nos. 1 and 2, on resuming their posts, break off with 
the feet furthest from the epaulment, inclining well to 
that side in order to avoid the blast. 

7. Number one (or the like) — Fire. 

50. Executed as in No. 25, except that the wheels are 
not chocked. 

What is prescribed in No. 26 will apply to this 
piece. 

51. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes 
the series of commands, beginning wdth From Battery. 

TO UNLOAD. 

52. The piece having been run from battery, the in- 
structor directs No. 2 to take out the shell and cartridge ; 
No. 4 carrying them to their place in rear of the piece. 
No. 3 assists No. 2, by raising the breech until the shell 
rolls to the muzzle. 



TO SCRAPE THE PIECE. 

53. In the course of firing, it may become necessary 
to scrape the piece. To cause this to be done, the in- 
structor directs the piece to be moved from battery, and 
then commands : 

Scrape the Piece. 

Nos. 1 and 2 lay down their handspikes. 



204 MA:NrAL for heavy artillery. 

No. 2 takes the scraper and wiper, giving the lattp 
to No. 1 ; thoroughly scrapes the chamber and bore ^ 
'draws out the scrapings with the spoon ; returns the 
scraper to its place, and resumes his post. 

No. 1, enveloping the sponge-head in the wiper, wipes 
out the bore, and returns the wiper to N. 2, who replaces 
it ; puts the sponge upon the props, and resumes his 
post. 

To change posts. 

To load for action. 

To cease firing. 

To secure piece ^ and replace implements. 

To leave the battery. 

Executed as in Nos. 28, 29, 30, 31 and 32 ; No. 4 
assisting No. 2 to take off the sleeves. 



TO SERVE THE PIECE WITH REDUCED NUMBERS. 

Executed as in No. 34. 

TRANSPORTATION. 

54. The transportation of an 8-inch siege howitzer re- 
quires eight horses and four drivers. 



CHARGES, ETC. 

55. 

Greatest charge of powder 4 lbs. 

Greatest charge, shell filled with bullets 3 lbs. 

Charge of the shell filled with powder 2 lbs. 9 oz. 

Bursting charge of the shell 1 lb. 

Charge to blow out the fuze 4 oz. 

Greatest elevation the carriage admits 15^ 

Greatest depression the carriage admits 10* 



MANUAL FOB HEAVY ARTILLEIiY. 205 

Range at an angle of 1°, charge 4 lbs 430 yards. 

Range at an angle of 5°, charge 4 lbs r..... 1150 " 

Range at an angle of 15°, charge 4 lbs 2300 " 

Proof range of powder 300 *' 

Weight of shell 45 lbs. 

Weight of the shell filled with bullets 65 lbs. 

The black fuze burns to the inch 2 seconds. 

The rec? fuze burns to the inch 3 ^' 

The ^ree7i fuze burns to the inch 4 " 

Thb i/e/Zoz^ fuze burns to the inch 5 *' 



A<; 2° elevation, black fuze, full charge" 
At 3° 25' " red fuze, " 

At 4° 25' *' green fuze, " 
At 5° 25' " yellow fuze, " 



The shell 
bursts at 



500 to 600 yds. 

800 to 900 yds. 

900 to 1000 yds. 

1000 to 1100 yds. 



A proper charge for enfilading, at the distance of 600 
yards, on a horizontal plane, relief of the epaulment seven 
feet, elevation 2*^.75, red fuze, is three pounds. 



TO PREPARE AMMUNITION. 

" 56. If the ammunition for howitzers is to be prepared 
and issued by the artillery, two men, numbered 5 and 6, 
are added to each detachment for that purpose. They 
are sent to the magazine, where they are provided with 
the following implements and stores : 

1 Set of Powder Measures, 

1 Funnel, 

1 Fuze-mallet 

1 Fuze-setter, 

1 Fuze plug-reamer, 

1 Rasp, 

1 Basket. Containing faze-plugs. 

2 Grummet-iuads^ or \ On wdiich to place the shells 
2 Hollow-blocks , ) while putting in the charge 

1 Wiper, 



206 MANUAL FOK HEAA^Y AKTILLERY. 

1 Budge-barrel. 

1 Dark Lantern. 

Tow, For stoppers. 

Cartridge hags. Of bombazine. 

TiDine. 

Powder, 

Musket bullets. 

Incendiary composition. 

They first fill and tie a number of cartridges, accord- 
ing to the directions received from the battery, and then 
prepare a corresponding number of shells. 

To Jill the cartridges. One holds the bag, while the 
other (by means of the funnel) pours in the powder. .The 
cartridges thus filled are placed upright in a box until 
tied, when they are transported to the budge-barrel. 

Cartridges of reduced charges for ricochet firing may 
be made thus : The charge having been poured into the 
bag, a wad of hay about six inches in length is placed upon 
it. This wad is made by laying wisps of hay evenly to- 
gether, so as to form a cylinder nearly of the diameter of 
the cartridge bag. The wad is tied about an inch from 
each end, and the ends are cut squarely off. so as to pre- 
sent an even surface to the powder. In handling these 
cartridges, the powder end of the bag should always be 
kept downwards. 

To prepare the shells. No. 5 places one upon a grum- 
met-wad ; cleanses it, if necessary, with a rasp ; drives in 
a faze-plug until it does not project more than the tenth 
of an inch ; and reams it out with the reamer. No. 6, 
transferring it to the other grummet-wad, charges it with 
powder ; puts in a stopper of tow ; marks it with chalk ; 
and places it conveniently for No. 4. 

If the shell is to be loaded with bullets or incendiary 
composition, it is charged before the fuze-plug is driven. 



MANUAL FOB HEAVY ARTILLERY. 



207 



It should contaiu about three hundred and twenty bullets 
and one pound and a quarter of powder. 

If filled only with powder, No. 6 marks the shell with 
a cross ; if with incendiary composition, he makes a circle 
around the fuze-plug ; and if with bullets, he makes two 
circles on one side. The shells thus differently charged 
are kept separate. 



i 



•1 



Handspikes 



Haversack, 



Tube-pouch, 



Gunner's-pouch, - 



LESSON III. 

Service of a 10-incJi Siege Mortar. 

Five men are necessary ; one gunner and four other 
cannoneers. 

57. The mortar is upon its platform. 

The implenients, etc., are arranged as follows : 

'' Two on each side of the bed, against 
the cheeks, leaning upon the four 
manoeuvring bolts, the small ends 
towards the epaulment, those of the 
front handspikes even with the front 
of the cheeks, 
r Containing fuzes and a pair of sleeves. 
Attached to the tompion, and lying 
upon the mortar. 
Containing the priming-wire, friction 
tubes, and the lanyard, wound in 
St. Andrew's cross upon its handle. 
Attached to the tompion, and lying 
upon the mortar. 

Containing the gunner's level, gimlet, 
vent-punch, and chalk. Attached to 
the tompion, and lying upon the 
mortar. 



208 MANUAL FOK HEAVY APwTILLERY. 



In a basket between the cheeks of the 
mortar bed. 



Quadrant, . 

Plummet, . 

Pointing-cord, 

Scraper, 

Wiper, . . 

Shell-hooks, , 

ToMPioN, . . In the muzzle. 

Qi Under the mortar upon the bolster, 
UOIN, , . . -^ ^ ^ 

( its handle to the left. 
Pointing-stakes, \ 
Maul, . . . >• With the basket. 
Broom, . . . ) 

When several mortars are served together, there will 
be only one gunner's level, and two vent-punches to each 
battery, not exceeding six pieces. To the same battery 
there will be one hammer-wrench. 

One shell and one paper cartridge bag for instruction, 
are at the magazine or other safe place in rear of the 
piece. 

58. The cannoneers having been marched to their 
posts, the instructor directs them to place their muskets 
against the epaulment, and then explains to them the 
names and uses of the implements, and the nomenclatures 
of the mortar, its bed, and the battery. 

59. To cause the pointing-stakes to be established in 
position, the instructor commands : 

Plant the Pointing-stakes. 

The gunner, assisted by Nos. 1 and 2, plants the stakes. 

No. 1, having driven the pointing-stakes, drives an- 
other stake one yard behind his post for holding the 
wiper, and replaces the maul near the basket. 

The gunner lays the slack of the pointing-cord at the 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLEBY. 209 

foot of the epaulment, leaving the plummet at the stake 
m rear of the piece. 

All resume their posts. 

60. To cause the implements to be distributed, the in- 
structor commands : 

Take Implements. 

The gunner steps to the front of the piece ; gives to 
No. 1 the sleeves and the wiper ; to No. 2 the basket and 
maul ; to No. 3 the tube-pouch and broom ; and to No. 
4 the haversack ; equips himself with the gunner's 
pouch ; applies his level to ascertain the line of metal, 
which he marks with chalk ; and resumes his post. 

No. 1 places the wiper upon the stake behind him, 
and, assisted by No. 3, puts on the sleeves. 

No. 2 removes the tompion, v/hich he places with the 
basket and maul, one yard behind him, and lays the shell- 
hooks on the ground between himself and the basket. 

No. 3 lays the broom on the ground behind him, and 
equips himself with the tube-pouch. 

No. 4 equips himself with the haversack, which he 
wears from the right shoulder to the left side. 

All take their handspikes. 

61. The handspikes are held as in No. 16. When 
laid down, they are returned, except in one case, to their 
places on the manoeuvring bolt. 

62. The instructor causes the service of the piece to 
be executed by the following commands : 

1. In Battery. 

The gunner, making a half-face to his right, steps off, 
left foot first, and places himself two paces in rear of the 
platform, facing the piece. 

Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, facing towards the epaulment, em- 
bar : Nos. 1 and 2 under the front manoeuvrino; bolts, 



210 MANUAL YOU HEAVY ARTLLLLKY. 

and Nos. 3 and 4 under those in the rear, engaging the 
butts of their handspikes about three inches. 

All being ready, the gunner gives the command, 
Heave, which will be repeated as often as may be neces- 
sary. As soon as the piece is on the middle of the plat- 
form, he commands Halt. All unbar, and resume their 
posts. 

2. Load by detail — Load. 

63. Nos. 1, 3, and 4, lay down their handspikes. 

The gunner taking the scraper, places himself in front 
of the muzzle, and scrapes the bore and chamber ; draws 
out the scrapings with the spoon ; returns the scraper to 
the basket, and again places himself at the muzzle, one 
yard in its front. 

No. 1, turning to his right, takes the wiper with the 
right hand ; faces to his left, and places the left foot near 
the manoeuvring bolt, the right in front of the muzzle, 
the left hand upon the face of the piece ; thoroughly wij)es 
out the chamber and bore, and resumes his post. 

No. 3, as soon as the piece is wiped, clears the vent 
with the priming-wire ; sweeps the platform, if necessary, 
and resumes his post and handspike. 

Nos. 2 and 4, facing to their right — No. 2 holding his 
handspike at the middle under the left arm, butt end 
foremost, and taking the shell-hooks in the right — go to 
the rear for a cartridge and shell. While No. 4 is getting 
the cartridge. No. 2 inserts the shell-hooks in the ears of 
the shell, and passes the small end of the handspike 
through the ring. In carrying the shell they hold the 
handspike with their right hands. No. 4 at the small end 
and in advance of No. 2. Passing by the left of the 
piece, between the gunner and the muzzle, they rest the 
shell upon the platform against the middle of the transom. 



MAlsUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 211 

No. 1, placing the wiper upon the handspike, receives 
the small end of the handspike from No. 4, who gives the 
cartridge to the gunner. 

The gunner advances the left foot, and places the left 
hand upon the face of the piece ; introduces the cartridge 
into the mouth of the chamber with the right hand, and 
carefully pours in the powder ; returns the cartridge bag 
to No. 4, and distributes the powder evenly over the 
bottom of the chamber. In firing with paper fuzes, he 
receives one from No. 4, and inserts it in the fuze-plug. 

No. 4, returning the cartridge bag to the haversack, 
takes the wiper. 

Nos. 1 and 2 raise the shell and hold it about a foot 
from the ground, while No. 4 wipes it ; they then lift it 
into the muzzle. 

The gunner steps forward, and with the left hand over 
the handspike, the right hand under and nearer to it, 
seizes the shell-hooks and assists to lower the shell gently 
into its place. No. 2 then withdraws his handspike from 
the ring, and resumes his post. No. 1 takes his hand- 
spike. The gunner adjusts the shell so that the fuze is in 
the axis of the piece ; throws the shell-hooks to their 
place behind No. 2 ; and, if firing with w^ooden fuzes, un- 
caps the fuze. 

No. 4, as soon as he svipes the shell, returns the wiper 
to its place ; takes the slack of the pointing-cord, which 
he lays over the left manoeuvring bolts, leashing its end 
at the rear pointing-stake ; and resumes his post and hand- 
spike. 

3. Point. 

64. Nos. 1 and 2, facing towards the epaulment, em- 
bar upon the bolster, under and perpendicularly to the 
pi^ce. 



"JirJ, MANUAL FOPw HEAVY AETILLEKY. 

The gunner taking the quadrant from the basket, ap- 
plies it to the left side of the face of the piece with the 
left hand, and inserts or draws out the quoin with the 
right, giving the command Raise, or Lower, until the 
piece is at the elevation required — usually 45°. Return- 
ing the quadrant to the basket — Nos. 1 and 2 at the same 
time unbarring and resuming their posts — he places him- 
self in rear of the rear pointing-stake, and holding the 
pointing-cord in the left hand and the plummet in the 
right, gives the direction ; commanding Mortar Left, 
Mortar Right ; Muzzle Left, Muzzle Right ; Trail 
Left, Trail Right, as may be required. 

To throw the mortar to the left, Nos. 2 and 4, facing 
each other, em bar under the manoeuvring bolts, Nos. 1 
and 3, facing towards the epaulment, embar under the 
notches near them. When all are ready, the gunner gives 
the command, Heave Steady. The cannoneers remain 
embarred until he gives some other command, or iriakes 
the signal to unbar. 

To throw the mortar to the right, Nos. 1 and 8 em- 
bar under the manoeuvring bolts. Nos. 2 and 4 embar 
under the notches. 

To throiu the muzzle to the left, Nos. 1 and 3, facing 
towards the epaulment, embar under the front notches ; 
No. 1 under the inside of the left notch. 

To throw the trail to the left. Nos. 1 and 3, facing 
towards the epaulment, embar under the rear notches ; 
No. 3 under the inside of the left notch. 

The muzzle or trail is thrown to the right, in a sim- 
ilar manner to the preceding, by Nos. 2 and 4. 

The direction having been given, the gunner gives the 
word, Ready, and makes a signal with both hands ; leaves 
the plummet at the stake ; returns the pointing-cord to 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 213 

tlie foot of the epaulment ; and goes to the windward to 
observe the effect of the shot. 

Nos. 1, 2, and 4, taking their handspikes with them, go 
four yards in rear of the platform, and face to the front ; 
No. 4 between Nos. 1 and 2, their handspikes held erect 
by the right side, the right arm extended naturally. 

No. 3 lays down his handspike six inches in his front, 
parallel to the edge of the platform, and makes ready a 
friction tube, as in No. 24 ; advancing the right foot, he 
puts the tube in the vent ; rises on the left leg, and moves 
three paces to the rear in prolongation of the right cheek ; 
faces to the front ; holds the handle of the lanyard with 
the right hand, the lanyard slightly stretched, the cord 
-passing between the fingers, back of the hand up ; and 
breaks to the rear a fall pace with the left foot, the left 
hand against the thigh. 

Memark. — To discharge the mortars now in use by 
means of a friction tube, the lanyard should be passed 
under a rope attached to and tightly drawn between the 
rear manoeuvring bolts, or through a loop of rope at- 
tached to the rear right manoeuvring bolt. 

4. Niimher one (or the like) — Fire. 

65. Executed as in No. 25. 

On the discharge of the piece, all resume their posts 
except the gunner, who waits to observe the effect of the 
shot. As soon as the shot strikes he resumes his post. 

What is prescribed in No. 26 will apply to this piece, 
omitting the word " /ocA\" 

%^, To continue the exercise, the instructor causes the 
piece to be moved towards the rear of the platform, di- 
rects Nos. 2 and 4 to take out the shell and carry it to 
the rear, and then resumes the series of commands begin- 
ning with In Battery. 



211 MAjXUAL for heavy AFvTILLEKY. 

TO CHANGE POSTS. TO LOAD FOR ACTION. TO CEASE FIRING. 

Executed as in Nos. 28, 29, and 30, except that in 
changing posts No. 2 passes by the front of the piece. 

TO SECURE PIECE, AND REPLACE IMPLEMENTS. 

67. To discontinue the exercise, the instructor having 
ordered the firing to cease, and caused the piece to be 
placed as at the command, In Battery, gives the com- 
mand : 

Replace Implements. 

All lay down their handspikes. No. 2 puts in the 
tompion, and assists No. 1 to pull up the pointing-stakes. 
The gunner receives the implements from the cannoneers, 
and replaces them between the cheeks. 

TO LEAVE the BATTERY, 

Executed as in No. 32. 

TRANSPORTATION. 

68. One mortar wagon is allowed to each 10-inch 
siege mortar and bed ; to transport which requires eight 
horses and four drivers. 



CHARGES, ETC. 

69. 

Greatest charge of powder 4 lbs. 

Ordinary service charge 3 " 

Charge of the shell filled with powder 5 " 

Bursting charge of the shell - 2 " 

Charge to blow out the fuze 5 oz. 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY AKTILLERY. 215 

Range, charge 4 lbs., time of flight 21" 2100 yards. 

Range, charge 3 lbs., time of flight 19" 1700 " 

Range, charge 2 lbs., time of flight 14" 1000 " 

Proof range of powder 300 '' 

Weight of the shell 90 lbs. 

Mve balls, according to their size, are fired from mor- 
tars of corresponding calibres. With a charge of one- 
twenty-fifth of its weight the ball is thrown from six hun- 
dred to seven hundred yards. 



TO PREPARE AMMUNITION. 

70. If the ammunition for mortars is to be prepared 
and issued by the artillery, two men, numbered 5 and 6, 
are added to each detachment for that purpose. Their 
duties at the magazine are similar to those prescribed in 
No. 56. 

Should wooden fuzes be used, in addition to the im- 
plements therein mentioned, a fuze-saw will be required 
for reducing the fuzes to the proper lengths. The shell 
being first charged, the fuze, cut at the right length, is 
then driven. 

The paper fuze is marked with the number of seconds 
which it burns per inch. It may be cut with a knife to 
any desired length. 



TIME OF FLIGHT. 

71. The time of flight for siege mortars, at an eleva- 
tion of 45°, with ordinary charges, is nearly equal to the 
square root of the range in feet divided by four. 

The experimental length of the fuze may be given ac- 
cord in<T to this rule. 



216 MANUAL FOPw HEAVY AKTILLEKY. 

TO ASCERTAIN THE DISTANCE BY THE REPORT OF FIRE-ARMS. 

72. Multiply the number of seconds which elapse be- 
tween seeing the flash and hearing the report by 1,100 ; 
the product will be nearly the distance in feet. 



RAPIDITY OF FIRING. 

73. Siege mortars can be fired conveniently at the 
rate of twelve rounds an hour continuously ; but they 
may in case of need, be fired with greater rapidity. 



LESSON I Y. 

Sermce of an S-inc7i Siege Mortar. 

Three men are necessary : one gunner and two other 
cannoneers. 

74. The mortar is upon its platform. 

The implements, etc., omitting two handspikes, and 
adding one grummet- wad, are the same as prescribed for 
the 10-inch siege mortar in No. 57. They are arranged 
as prescribed in that number. The wad is in the basket. 

75. The instruction for this piece is the same as that 
prescribed in Lesson III., with the following modifica- 
tions : 

At the command Take Implements, No. 1 performs 
the duties enjoined on No. 3, and No. 2 those of No. 4, 
each in addition to his own. No. 2 assists No. 1 to put 
on the sleeves, and places the wad on the platform in 
front of the transom. 

76. At the command In Battery, No. 1 embars under 
the right front manoeuvring bolts. No. 2 embars under 
the left rear manoeuvrina^ bolts. 



MAK^UAL FOK HEAVY ARTILLERY. 217 

77. At the command Load, No. 1, having wiped out 
the mortar, places the wiper upon the stake ; pricks ; and, 
if necessary, sweeps the platform. 

No. 2, laying down his handspike, goes for a cartridge 
and shell ; carries the shell in the right arm ; passes be- 
tween the gunner and the muzzle, and places it on the 
wad ; gives to the gunner the cartridge, and if firing with 
paper fuzes, a fuze ; and takes the wiper from the 
stake. 

The gunner, on returning the scraper to the basket, 
takes the shell-hooks and lays them on the ground be- 
tween himself and the muzzle. Having carefully poured 
in the powder, he returns the cartridge-bag to No. 2, 
and distributes the powder evenly over the bottom of the 
chamber ; puts the fuze in the fuze-plug ; inserts the 
hooks in the ears of the shell ; raises it about a foot from 
the ground and holds it, while No. 2 wipes it ; and then 
places it in the bore. 

No. 2 replaces the wiper upon the stake ; lays the 
slack of the pointing-cord over th.e left manosuvring bolts ; 
and resumes his post. 

78. At the command Point, Nos. 1 and 2 embar 
under either of the front or rear notches, as required. 
At the signal from the gunner. No. 1 prepares to fire the 
piece, as prescribed for No. 3, in No. 64. 



TRANSPORTATION. 

79. One mortar wagon will carry three 8-inch siege 
mortars, with their beds ; to transport which requires 
eight horses and four drivers. 
10 



218 ma:nual for heavy aktillery 



CHARGES, ETC. 

Greaicst charge of powder .t^. 2 lbs. 

Ordinary service charge 1 lb. 12 oz. 

Charge of the shell filled with powder 2 lbs. 9 oz. 

Bursting charge of the shell 1 lb. 

Charge to blow out the fuze 4 oz. 

Hange, charge 2 lbs., time of flight 20" 1,837 yards. 

Range, charge 1| lb., time of flight 14" 943 " 

Proof range of powder 300 " 

Weight of shell 45 lbs. 



LESSON V. 

Service of a Ooehorii Mortar. 

Three men are necessary : one gunner and Uvo other 
cannoneers. 

81. The mortar is upon its platform. 

The implements, etc., and their arrangement, are the 
same as prescribed for the 8-inch siege mortar in No. 74. 
A 24-pdr. shell is used. 

82. The instruction for this piece is the same as that 
prescribed in Lesson IV. 

To prepare its ammunition, and to transport it by 
hand with ease, two additional men are required. The 
gunner carries the basket and implements. 

83. It is fired either from behind intrenchments, like 
other mortars, or it may accompany troops in efTectiug 
lodgments in towais and fortified places. 

84. As the shell is without ears, it should be strapped 
with tin, having loops attached, through which a cord is 
passed for the purpose of lowering it into the bore. The 
chamber being cylindrical, a sponge is used, which is 
handled by No. 1. 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLEBY. 219 

CHARGES, ETC. 

85. 

Greatest charge of powder .-,.... 8 oz. 

Charge of the shell filled with powder .., 1 lb. 

Bursting charge of the shell 8 oz. 

Charge to blow out the fuze 2 oz. 

Range, charge 8 oz 1,200 yards. 

Range, charge 6 oz 900 '* 

Range, charge 4 oz 430 *^ 

Proof range of powder 300 " 

Weight of shell 17 lbs. 

LESSON YI. 

Sermce of a 10-inch Sea-coast Mortar. 

Five men are necessary : one gunner and four other 
cannoneers. 

86. The mortar is upon its platform. 

The implements, etc., with the addition of one sponge, 
are the same as prescribed for the 10-inch siege mortar 
in No. 57. They are arranged as prescribed in that 
number, except that the sponge is placed upon props one 
yard behind No. 1, the sponge-head turned towards the 
epaulment. 

87. The instruction for this piece is the same as that 
prescribed in Lesson III., with the following modifications : 

No. 1, after wiping the bore, sponges out the cham- 
ber ; for this purpose mounting upon the right cheek and 
bolster. 

To scrape the bore, and to put in the cartridge and 
shell, the gunner mounts upon a block in front of the 
muzzle. 

The cartridge — its bag being of bombazine or flannel 
• — is put directly into the chamber by the gunner, and 
rammed by No. 1. 



220 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 

To lift the shell into the muzzle, Nos. 2 and 3 mount 
the cheeks, and are assisted respectively by the gunner 
and No. 1. 

In giving the elevation, Nos. 1 and 2 are assisted by 
Nos. 3 and 4. 

Before priming, No. 3 pricks a second time. 



CHARGES, ETC. 

88. 

Greatest charge of powder 10 lbs. 

Charge of shell filled with powder 5 " 

Bursting charge of the shell ....o 2 " 

Charge to blow out the fuze 5 oz. 

Range, charge 10 lbs., time of flight 86" 4,250 yards. 

Proof range of powder 300 " 

Weight of shell 90 lbs. 



LESSON VII. 

Service of a IZ-incJi Sea-coast Mortar. 

Five men are necessary : one gunner and four other 
cannoneers. 

89. The mortar is upon its platform. 

The implements, etc., and their arrangement, are the 
same as prescribed for the lO-inch sea-coast mortar in 
No. 86. 

90. The instruction for this piece differs in no respect 
from that prescribed in Lesson VI. 



CHARGES, ETC. 

91. 

Greatest charge of powder 20 lbs. 

Charge of the shell filled with powder 11 *' 

Bursting charge of the shell 6 " 



MANUAL FOK HEAVY AETILLEKY. 221 

Charge to blow out the fuze 6 oz. 

Kange, charge 20 lbs., time of flight (about) 40" 4,325 yards. 

Proof range of powder 300 " 

Weight of shell 200 lbs. 



LESSON VIII. 

Service of a Stone Mortar. 

Five men are necessary : one gunner and fonr other 
cannoneers. 

92. The mortar is upon its platform. 

The implements, etc., and their arrangement, are the 
same as prescribed for the 10-inch sea-coast mortar in 
No. 86. 

93. The instruction for this piece differs in no respect 
from that prescribed in Lesson VI. 

A wooden bottom is placed over the mouth of the 
chamber to receive the basket which contains the charge 
of stones. 

CHARGES, ETC. 

94. With a charge of a pound and a half of powder, 
and one hundred and twenty pounds of stones, at an ele- 
vation of 60*^, the stones are thrown from one hundred 
and fifty to two hundred and fifty yards. 

With fifteen 6-pdr. shells, fuze fifteen seconds, charge 
of powder one pound, elevation 33°, the shell may be 
thrown from fifty to one hundred and fifty yards. 

95. As the shells are liable to burst on leaving the 
bore, the piece is fired by a slow match applied to a train 
of quick match, giving the men time to place themselves 
under cover. 



222 



MANUAL FOK HEAVY ARTILLrRY. 



LESSON IX. 



Handspikes, 



Service of a Gun mounted on a Barlette Carriage. 

Remark. — The instruction for a barbette gun, although in many 
respects precisely the same as that for a siege gun, is given in full, 
because the siege gun is seldom found in the forts on the sea-board. 

Five men are necessary : one gunner and four other 
cannoneers. 

96. The piece is in battery. 

The implements, etc., are arranged as follows : 

C Two on each side of the carriage, lean- 
ing against the parapet, in line with 
the cannoneers. 

One yard behind the cannoneers of the 
right, the sponge uppermost, the 
sponge and rammer-heads turned 
from the parapet, inclined slightly 
Sponge-rammer, ^ from the piece, and supported upon 
a prop ; or, when this cannot be done 
conveniently, placed against thew^all, 
the sponge and rammer-heads near- 
est the piece. 

Against the parapet, outside of the 
pile of balls. 

Containiug friction tubes, and the lan- 
yard, wound in St. Andrew's cross 
upon its handle. Suspended from 
the knob of the cascable. 
'' Containing the gunner's level, breech- 
sight, finger-stall, priming-wire, gim- 
let, vent-punch, chalk-line, and chalk. 
Suspended from the knob of the cas- 
cable. 



Pass-box, 



Tube-pouch, 



Gunner' s-POucH, < 






•H 

i 





0) 

I 





u 

Pi 





MANUAL FOR HEAVY ABTILLERY. 223 

r One on each side of the piece, at the 
Chocks, . . . ^ foot of the parapet, inside the hand- 
le spikes. 
Vent-coyer, . Covering the vent. 
ToMPioN, . . In the muzzle. 

P» j Leaning against the parapet, outside 

^ ' * * * ( of the pile of balls. 

r Containing cartridges, at the safest and 
Budge-barrel, < most convenient place in rear of the 
I piece. 
When several guns are served together, there will be 
only one gunner's level and two vent-punches to each 
battery, not exceeding six pieces. To the same battery 
there will be one worm, one ladle^ and one wrench. 

The balls are regularly piled on the banquette, on the 
left of the piece. 

The wads are placed between the parapet and the 
balls, partly resting on them. 

97. The cannoneers having been marched to their 
posts, the instructor explains to them the names and 
uses of the implements, and the nomenclatures of the gun, 
its carriage, and the battery. 

98. To cause the implements to be distributed, the 
instructor commands : 

Take Implements. 

The gunner mounts upon the tongue; takes off the 
vent-cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the para- 
pet, outside of the pass-box ; gives the tube-pouch to No. 
3 ; equips himself with his own pouch and the finger-stall, 
wearing the latter oji the second finger of the left hand ; 
levels the piece by the elevating screw ; applies his level 
to ascertain the line of metal, which, with the assistance 
of No. 2, he marks with the chalk-line ; and resumes his 
post. 



224 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 

No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch. 
Nos. 1 and 2, after passing handspikes to Nos. 3 and 
4, take each one for himself 

99. The handspike is held in both hands ; the hand 
nearest to the parapet grasping it near the small end and 
at the height of the shoulder, back of the hand down, 
elbow touching the body ; the other hand back up, the 
arm extended naturally ; the butt of the handspike upon 
the ground on the side farthest from the parapet, and six 
inches in advance of the alignment. 

100. When the cannoneer lays down his handspike, he 
places it directly before him, about six inches in advance 
of, and parallel to the alignment, the small end towards 
the parapet ; and whenever he thus lays it down for the 
performance of any particular duty, he will resume it 
on returning to his post after the completion of that 
duty. 

101. The instructor causes the service of the piece to 
be executed by the following commands : 

1. From Battery. 

The gunner moves two paces to his right. 

Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, facing from the parapet, embar, 
near the tire ; Nos. 1 and 2 first facing the chocks on the 
rails in front of the rollers through the front spokes of 
the wheels, over the front manoeuvring bolts ; and Nos. 
IT and 4 through the rear spokes, under the rear ma- 
noeuvring bolts. 

Should there be no rear manoeuvring bolts, Nos. 3 
and 4 embar under the braces, near the manoeuvring 
staples. 

All being ready, the gunner gives the command Heave, 
which will be repeated as often as may be necessary. As 
soon as the face of the piece is about one yard from the 



MAIS fTTAT, FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 225 

parapet, he commands Halt. All unbar, and resume 
their posts. Nos. 1 and 2 chock the rollers. 

2. Load by Detail — Load. 

102. Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 lay down their handspikes. 

No. 2 takes out the tompion, and places it near the 
vent-cover. 

No. 1 faces once and a half to his left ; steps over the 
sponge and rammer ; faces the piece ; takes the sponge 
with both hands, the backs down, the right hand three 
feet from the sponge-head, the left hand eighteen inches 
nearer to it ; returns to the piece, placing the left foot on 
the rail of the chassis in line with the face of the piece, 
the right in the most convenient position ; and rests the 
end of the sponge in the muzzle, the staff in the prolonga- 
tion of the bore, supported by the right hand, the right 
arm extended, the left hand fiat against the side of the 
thigh. 

Remark. — Iii order that Nos. 1 and 2 may load with facility with- 
out standing on the chassis, a banquette should be placed between 
the head of the chassis and the wall, or a platform attached to the 
head of the chassis. 

No. 2 steps upon the rail on his side, and occupies a 
position on the left of the piece corresponding to that of 
No. 1 on its right. He seizes the staff with the left 
hand, back down, near to and outside of the hand of 
No. 1. 

No. 3, as soon as the sponge is inserted in the bore, 
steps over the rammer and seizes the staff with both 
hands, as prescribed for the sponge ; returns to his post ; 
and stands ready to exchange with No. 1. 

No. 4 takes the pass-box and goes to the rear for a 
cartridge ; returns with it, and places himself, facing the 
piece, about eighteen inches to the rear and right of 
No. 2. 

10* 



226 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 

The gunner mounts upon the tongue of the chassis, 
placing the left foot about six inches from the rear tran- 
som of the gun carriage, and breaks well to the rear with 
the right foot, the toe to the right.; closes the vent with 
the second finger of the left hand, bending w^ell forward 
to cover himself by the breech ; and turns the elevating 
screw with the right hand, so as to adjust the piece con- 
veniently for loading. 

103. In the mean time, Nos. 1 and 2 insert the sponge 
by the following motions : 

First motion, — They insert the sponge as far as the 
hand of No. 1, bodies erect, shoulders square. 

Second motion. — They slide the hands along the staff 
and seize it at arm's length. 

Third motion, — They force the sponge down as pre- 
scribed in the first motion. 

Fourth motion, — They repeat the second motion. 

Fifth ^notion, — They push the sponge to the bottom 
of the bore. No. 1 replaces the left hand on the staff, 
back up, six inches nearer to the muzzle than the right. 
No. 2 places the right hand, back up, between the hands 
of No. 1. 

If in executing these motions, or the corresponding 
ones wdth the rammer, it be found that the sponge or 
rammer is at home at the third or fourth motion, then 
what is prescribed for the fifth motion, will be performed 
at the third or fourth. The knee on the side towards 
which the body is to be inclined is always bent, the other 
straightened ; and the weight of the body added, as much 
as possible, to the effort exerted by the arms. 

3. Sponge. 

104. Nos. 1 and 2, pressing the sponge firmly against 
the bottom of the bore, turn it three times from right to 



MANUAL FOE HEAYY AKTILLERY. 227 

left^ and three times from left to right ; replace the hands 
on the thighs ; and withdraw the sponge by motions con- 
trary to those prescribed for inserting it. 

Remarlc. — To handle the sponge when it is new and fits tight, 
it may become necessary for Nos. 1 and 2 to use both hands. In 
this case it will be inserted and withdrawn by short and quick mo- 
tions. 

No. 2 quits the staff, and turning towards No. 4, re- 
ceives from him the cartridge, which he takes in both 
hands, back down, and introduces into the bore bottom 
foremost, seams to the sides ; he then grasps the rammer 
in the way prescribed for the sponge. 

No. 1, rising upon the right leg and turning towards 
his left, passes the sponge above the rammer with the left 
hand to No. 3, and receiving the rammer with the right, 
presents it as prescribed for the sponge, except that he 
rests the rammer-head against the right side of the face 
of the piece. 

No. 3, as soon as the sponge is withdrawn, passing 
the rammer under the sponge with the right hand, re- 
ceives the sponge from No. 1 with the left, replaces it 
upon the prop, and resumes his post. 

No. 4, setting down the pass-box, takes out the car- 
tridge and presents it in both hands to No. 2, the choke 
to the front ; returns the pass-box to its place ; and 
picks up a ball, and afterwards a wad, should one be re- 
quired. 

Nos. 1 and 2 force down the cartridge by the motions 
prescribed for forcing down the sponge. 

4. Ram. 

105. Nos. 1 and 2, drawing the rammer out to the 
full extent of their arms, ram with a single stroke. No. 
2 quits the staff, and turning towards No. 4, receives from 
him the ball and wad, while No. 1 throws out the ram- 



228 MAis^UAL FOll HEAVY ARTILLEEY. 

mer, and holds the head against the right side of the face 
of the piece. No. 2, receiving successively the ball and 
wad, introduces them into the bore, the ball first, and 
seizes the staff with the left hand. No. 4 then resumes 
his post. 

Nos. 1 and 2 force down the ball and wad together 
by the same motions, and ram in the same manner as 
prescribed for the cartridge. No. 2 quits the rammer ; 
sweeps, if necessary, the platform on his own side ; passes 
the broom to No. 1 ; and resumes his post. No. 1 throws 
out the rammer, and places it upon the prop below the 
sponge ; finishes the sweeping ; and resumes his post. 

The gunner pricks, leaving the priming-wire in the 
vent, and, if firing beyond point-blank range, adjusts the 
breech-sight to the distance. 

5. In Battery. 

106. Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the rollers, and with Nos. 
3 and 4, all facing towards the parapet, embar ; Nos. 1 
p,nd 2 through the front spokes of the wheels, near the 
iire, under the manoeuvring bolts ; and Nos. 3 and 4 
under the braces, near the manoeuvring staples. 

All being ready, the gunner commands Heave, and 
the piece is run into battery ; the gunner following up 
the movement. As soon as the rollers touch the hurters, 
he commands Halt. All unbar, and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 
resume their posts. 

6. Point. 

107. No. 3 lays down his handspike ; passes the hook 
of the lanyard through the eye of a tube from front to 
rear ; and holds the handle of the lanyard with the right 
hand, the hook between the thumb and forefinger. 

Nos. 1 and 4 go to the traverse wheels, and, facing 
towards the parapet, embar under the fork-bolts or under 



MANUAL FOB HEAYY AKTILLERY. 229 

the wheels. No. 1, in passing from and to his post, 
moves on the outside of No. 3. 

The gunner withdraws the priming-wire, and, aided 
by Nos. 1 and 4, gives the direction ; causing the trail to 
be moved by commanding Left, or Right, tapping, at 
the same time, on the right side of the breech for No. 1 
to move the chassis to the left, or on the left side for No. 
4 to move it to the right. 

He then places the centre point of the breech-sight 
accurately upon the chalk mark on the base-ring, and by 
the elevating screw gives the proper elevation, rectifying 
the direction, if necessary. 

The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises 
on the left leg, and gives the word Ready, making a 
signal with both hands, at which Nos. 1 and 4 unbar, and 
resume their posts ; takes the breech-sight with the left 
hand, and receiving the tube from No. 3, inserts it in the 
vent ; dismounts from the tongue ; and goes to the wind- 
ward to observe the effect of the shot. 

No. 3 drops the handle, allowing the lanyard to un- 
coil as he steps back to his post, holding it slightly 
stretched with the right hand, the cord passing between 
the fingers, back of the hand up, and breaks to the rear a 
full pace with the left foot, the left hand against the thigh. 

At the word. Ready, Nos. 1 and 2 take the chocks, 
and, breaking off with the feet farthest from the parapet, 
stand ready to chock the rollers. 

J 08. In directing the piece to be fired, the instructor 
will designate it by its number, as, for example : 

7. Number one — Fire. 

No. 3 gives a smart pull upon the lanyard. 
Immediately after the discharge of the piece, Nos. 1 
and 2 chock the rollers, and resume the erect position. 



230 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 

No. 3 resumes the erect position, and rewinds the lanyard 
in St. Andrew's cross upon its handle, returning it, if dry, 
to the tube-pouch. The gunner, having observed the ef- 
fect of the shot, returns to his post. 

109. Whenever the piece is to be fired by a lock, port" 
fire, or slowmatch, it will be done by No. 3, as prescribed 
for No. 4, in the instruction for field artillery. 

110. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes 
the series of commands, beginning with From Battery. 

TO change posts. 

111. To change posts, the instructor commands: 
1. Change posts, 2. March, 3. Call off , 

At the first command, the cannoneers lay down their 
handspikes ; place their equipments on the parts of the 
carriage nearest to them ; and face to their left. 

At the second command, they step off*, each advancing 
one post ; No. 2 taking that of No. 1. Nos. 2 and 3 pass 
to the rear of the chassis ; No. 2 on the outside of all the 
cannoneers. On arriving at their posts, they face to the 
piece, and equip themselves. 

At the third command, they call off, according to the 
posts they are to occupy. 

TO LOAD FOR ACTION. 

112. The cannoneers having been sufficiently instructed 
in the details of the movements, the instructor commands : 

Load for action — Load. 
The piece is run from battery, loaded, run into bat- 
tery, pointed, and prepared for firing, by the following 
commands from the gunner : From Battery — Load — In 
Battery — Point — Ready. 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 231 

At the command, or signal, from the instructor to 
commence firing, the gunner gives the command, Fire, 
and continues the action until the instructor directs the 
firing to cease. 

TO CEASE FIRINO. 

113. To cause the firing to cease, the instructor com- 
mands : 

Cease Firing. 

"Whether the cannoneers are loading hy detail or for 
action^ the piece is sponged out, and all resume their posts. 
If the cartridge has been inserted the loading will be com- 
pleted, unless the instructor should otherwise direct. 

TO SECURE PIECE, AND REPLACE IMPLEMENTS. 

114. To discontinue the exercise, the instructor having 
ordered the firing to cease, and caused the piece to be run 
into battery, gives the following commands : 

1. Secure Piece. 

No. 2 returns the tompion to the muzzle. The gunner 
puts on the vent cover, which he receives from No. 2, 
and depresses the piece. 

2. Replace Implements. 

Nos. 1 and 2 replace the handspikes against the para- 
pet, Nos. 3 and 4 passing theirs to them for that purpose. 
The gunner hangs the pouches upon the knob of the cas- 
cable. 

TO LEAVE the BATTERY. 

115. The instructor forms the detachment in rear of 
the piece, and marches it from the battery as prescribed 
in No. 12. 



232 MANUAI. FOE HEAVY AliTILLERY. 

TO SERVE THE PIECE WITH REDUCED NUMBERS. 

Executed as in No. 34. 



CHARGES, ETC. 

Wads, 

Rapidity of firing. 
Penetration of shot. 
See Nos. 37, 39, and 40. 



LESSON XII. 

Sermce of a Gun mounted on a Casemate Carriage. 

Five men are necessary : one gunner and four other 
cannoneers. 

120. The piece is in battery. 

The implements, etc., are arranged as follows : 

r One on each side of the carriage, lean- 
^ ing against the wall, in line with the 
cannoneers. 



SPIKES, . . 



r One on each side of the carriage, lean- 
ND- I .^^^ against the wall, behind Nos. 3 
^""^^^^ • • I and 4* 

r One on each side of the carriage, lean- 

< ing against the wall, opposite to the 

HANDSPIKES, . j i? ^i. ^ 

' L end 01 the tongue. 

r Leaning against the wall, behind the 

Roller-hand- i -j j • ^.i, t 

< gunner, or laid down m the align- 

L ment on his right. 



SPIKE, 



* These are manoeuvring handspikes. With two pieces in one casemate, or 
where the pieces are not separated by piers, they may be placed against the 
nearest wall, or laid down in the most conyenient position. 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 



233 



Sponge-rammer, 



Pass-box, 



Tube-pouch, 



Gunner' s-poucH, < 



Chocks, . . 
Vent-cover, 

TOMPION, 

Broom, . . 



Budge-barrel, 



'' About one yard behind the cannoneers 
of the right, the sponge uppermost, 
the sponge and rammer-heads turned 
from the embrasure, inclined slight- 
ly from the piece, and supported 
upon a proper block. 
Behind No. 4. 
f Containing friction tubes, and the lan- 
J yard, wound in St. Andrew's cross 
upon its handle. Suspended from 
the knob of the cascable. 

Containing the gunner's level, breech- 
sight, finger-stall, priming-wire, gim- 
let, vent-punch, chalk-line, and chalk. 
Suspended from the knob of the cas- 
cable. 

{One on each side of the carriage, on 
the front transom of the chassis, 
handles outwards. 
Covering the vent. 
In the muzzle. 
J Leaning against the scarp-wall, on the 
( left of the piece, 
r Containing cartridges, at the safest and 
< most convenient place in rear of 
L the piece. 



When several guns are served together, there will be 
only one gunner's level and two vent-punches to each bat- 
tery, not exceeding six pieces. To the same battery there 
will be one worm, one ladle, and one wrench. 

The balls are regularly piled against the wall, behind 
No. 2. 



234 MANUAL FOK HEAVY ARTILLERY. 

The wads are placed between the wall and the balls, 
partly resting on them. 

121. The cannoneers having been marched to their 
posts, the instructor explains to them the names and uses 
of the implements, and the nomenclatures of the gun, its 
carriage, and the battery. 

122. To cause the implements to be distributed, the 
instructor commands : 

Take Implements. 

The gunner mounts upon the tongue ; takes off the 
vent-cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the 
scarp ; gives the tube-pouch to No. 3 ; and equips him- 
self with his own pouch and the finger-stall, wearing the 
latter on the second finger of the left hand. With the as- 
sistance of No. 3 he levels the piece, and applies his level 
to ascertain the line of metal, which, with the assistance 
of No. 2, he marks with the chalk line. (If the gun has 
permanent sights, this is only necessary for instruction, 
or for verifying the sight.) He then takes the roller- 
handspike, and resumes his post. This handspike is held 
vertically with the right hand, the lower end upon the 
ground in line with the toes, the arms extended naturally. 

No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch. 

Nos. 1 and 2 take the truck-handspikes with the hand 
farthest from the wall, and carry them to that side, hold- 
ing them vertically, the lower end upon the ground in line 
with the toes, the arms extended naturally. 

123. The instructor causes the service of the piece to 
be executed by the following commands : 

1. From Battery. 

The gunner embars in the left mortise of the roller. 
Nos. 1 and 2, facing from the scarp wall, embar in 
the most convenient front mortises of the truck-wheels, 



MANUAL FOB HEAVY AETILLEEY. 235 

the hand farthest from the carriage at the top of the hand- 
spike, the other hand eight inches lower. 

Nos. 3 and 4 go to the assistance of Nos. 1 and 2, 
and, facing towards them, seize the handspikes with both 
hands between those of Nos. 1 and 2. 

Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 in applying themselves to the car- 
riage either to run it from or to battery, break to the 
rear with the foot nearest to the carriage. 

All being ready, the gmmer presses the roller under 
the rear transom of the gun carriage, by bearing down 
upon his handspike, and gives the command, Heave. 

Nos. 1, 2, 3. and 4 act together, and bear upon the 
handspikes until they are nearly down to the rails. The 
gunner then disengages the roller from under the transom 
by raising his handspike, and commands, Unbar. Nos. 1 
and 2 let go the handspikes with the hand nearest to the 
the carriage, and chock the wheels. Nos. 3 and 4 with- 
draw the handspikes and pass them to Nos. 1 and 2, who 
re-insert them in the front mortises. 

The gunner again bearing down upon his handspike, 
gives the command. Heave, and so on, until the face of 
the piece is about one yard from the wall, when, raising 
his handspike, he commands, Halt, and shifts it into the 
right mortise of the roller. Nos. 1 and 2 chock the 
wheels, and replace their handspikes against the wall. 
All resume their posts. 

2. Load by detail — Load. 

124. Executed as in Nos. 103 and 104, with the fol- 
lowing modification : No. 3, facing towards the scarp, 
embars under the breech, and maintains the piece in a 
covenient position for inserting the sponge, until he re- 
ceives a signal from the gunner to unbar. 

3. Sponge. 

125. Executed as in No. 104. 



236 MANUAL FOR HEAVT ARTILLERY. 

4. Ram. 

126. Executed as in No. 105. 

5. In Battery. 

127. Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the wheels, and, facing 
from the scarp wall apply their hands to the front of the 
cheeks. 

Nos. 3 and 4, facing towards the scarp wall, lay hold 
of the handles. 

The gunner bears down carefully upon the roller- 
handspike, and the piece is run into battery. As soon as 
the wheels touch the hurters, he commands, Halt. Nos. 
1, 2, 3, and 4 resume their posts. 

6. Point. 

128. Nos. 1 and 4 take the traversing handspikes, and, 
facing towards the scarp wall, embar under the ends of 
the rear transom of the chassis. No. 1, in passing to and 
from his post, moves on the outside of No. 3. 

When the elevation is given by the quoin. No. 2 takes 
an elevating handspike and embars upon the left cheek 
under the re-inforce. 

The gunner withdraws the priming-wire, and, aided by 
Nos. 1 and 4, gives the direction, as in No. 107. 

He then applies the breech sight, if necessary, and 
points the piece ; commanding Lower, or Raise, tapping 
at the same time on the upper side of the knob of the 
cascable with the left hand, and drawing out the quoin 
with the right, in order to elevate, or tapping upwards on 
the lower side and shoving in the quoin, in order to de- 
press the piece. 

The moment the piece is correctly pointed^ he rises 
on the left leg, and gives the word, Ready, making a sig- 
nal with both hands, at which Nos. 1, 2, and 4 unbar, re- 
place their handspikes, and resume their posts ; takes the 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 237 

breech-sight with the left hand, the roller-handspike with 
the right, and disposes himself to observe the effect of the 
shot. 

If the elevation is given by a screw, No. 3 turns its 
handle by direction of the gunner. 

No. 3, having passed the hook of the lanyard through 
the eye of a tube from front to rear, inserts it in the vent, 
And stretches the lanyard as in No. 107. 

At the word. Ready, Nos. 1 and 2 take the chocks, 
and breaking off with the feet farthest from the wall, 
stand ready to chock the wheels. 

7o Number one (or the like) — Fire. 

129. Executed as in No. 108. 

What is prescribed in No. 109 will apply to this 
piece. 

130, To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes 
the series of commands, beginning with From Battery : 

To change posts » 
To load for action^ 
To cease firing. 

To secure piece ^ and replace implements. 
Executed as in Nos. Ill, 112, 113, and 115. 



TO LEAVE THE BATTERY. 

131. The instructor forms the detachment in rear of 
the piece, and marches it from the battery as prescribed 
in No. 12. 

132. Remark — ^The service of a gun mounted on a case- 
mate carriage of the old pattern, (which is without the 
eccentric roller,) will require the following modification : 
The roller-handspike is dispensed with, and the gunner, at 
the command. From Battery, moves two paces to the 
right. 



238 MANUAL FOE HEAVY ARTILLERY. 

TO SERVE THE PIECE WITH REDUCED NUMBERS. 

Executed as in No. 34. 

CHARGES, ETC. 

133. The ordinary service charge of powder for heavy- 
guns is one-fourth the weight of the shot. For firing 
double shot it is one-sixth that weight. 

Range of a 42-pdr., at an elevation of 1° 30', charge 

lO^lbs 860 yards. 

Range of a 42-pdr., at an elevation of 5°, charge 

lOilbs 1,955 ", 

Range of a 32-pdr., at an elevation of 1° 30', charge 

8 lbs 800 " 

Range of a 32-pdr., at an elevation of 5°, charge 8 lbs. 1,922 " 

Proof range of powder 300 " 

Greatest elevation the carriage admits 8° 

Greatest depression the carriage admits 4° 

Wads. 

Rapidity of firing. 
Penetration of shot. 
See Nos. 37 39, and 40. 

LESSON XIII. 

Sermce of an S-inch Colmnbiad mounted on a Casemate Gar- 

Hage, 

Five men are necessary : one gunner and four otner 
cannoneers. 

134. The piece is in battery. 

The implements, etc., and their arrangement, are the 
same as prescribed for the casemate gun in No. 120, sub- 
stituting haversack — worn by No. 4 from the right shoul- 
der to the left side — for pass-box. 



MANUAJL FOK HEAVY ARTILLERY. 239 

The shells are at the magazine, or other safe position, 
and are brought, as required, to the place prescribed for 
the budge-barrel. 

135. The instruction for this piece differs in no ma- 
terial respect from that prescribed in Lesson XIL 

It is loaded with shell, which is attached to a sabot. 
The shell is brought up by No. 4 together with the car- 
tridge, and is set home in the same manner as the ball, ex- 
cept that it is not rammed. 



CHARGES, ETC. 

136. 

Greatest charge of powder 10 lbs. 

Charge of the shell filled with powder 2 lbs. 9 oz. 

Bursting charge of the shell 1 lb. 

Charge to blow out the fuze 4 oz. 

Kangeat an angle of 1°, charge 10 lbs. ) Axis of the piece j 919 yards. 
Range at an angle of 5°, charge 10 lbs. j the water. ( 1,813 " 

Proof range of powder 300 '' 

Weight of shell 50 lbs. 



LESSON XIY. 

Sermce of a 24:'pdr, Howitzer mounted on a Flanh Casemate 
Carriage, 

Three men are necessary : one gunner and two other 
cannoneers. 

137. The piece is in battery. 

The implements, etc., are arranged as follows : 
Roller-hand- j Leaning against the scarp wall, behind 

SPIKE, . . . ( No. 2. 
^ A "R f L^^^^^g against the scarp wall, behind 

MER, 



'< No. 1, the rammer-head on the 
I ground. 



240 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 



Haversack, 



Tube-pouch, 



Vent-cover, 

TOMPION, . . 

Broom, . . 
Budge-barrel, ■< 



j Suspended from the knob of the cas- 
( cable. 

Containing the finger-stall, priming- 
wire, friction tubes, and the lanj^ard, 
wound in St. Andrew's cross upon 
its handle. Suspended from the 
knob of the cascable. 

Covering the vent. 

In the muzzle. 

On the left of the piece. 

Containing cartridges, at the safest and 
most convenient place in rear of the 
piece. 

The rounds of canister are arranged against the scarp 
wall, behind No. 2. The shells, if used, are at the maga- 
zine, or other safe position, and are brought, as required, 
to the place prescribed for the budge-barrel. 

138. The cannoneers having been marched to their 
posts, the instructor explains to them the names and uses 
of the implements, and the nomenclatures of the howitzer, 
ite carriage, and the battery. 

139. To cause the implements to be distributed, the 
instructor commands : 

Take Implements. 

The gunner takes the priming- wire and finger- stall, 
wearing the latter on the second finger of the right hand ; 
gives the tube-pouch to No. 1, and the haversack to No. 
2 ; takes off the vent-cover and places it against the scarp 
wall outside of the canisters ; seizes the roller-handspike 
with the right hand, and resumes his post ; holding the 
handspike vertically on the right side, its lower end in 
line with the toes, the arm extended naturally. 

No. 1 equips himself with the tube-poucL 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY AETILLEEY. 241 

No. 2 equips himself with the haversack, which he 
wears from the right shoulder to the left side. 

140. The instructor causes the service of the piece to 
be executed by the following commands : 

1. From Battery. 

The gunner, embarring on the left mortise, presses 
the roller under the rear transom, and seizes the left 
handle with the left-hand. 

Nos. 1 and 2 lay hold of the manoeuvring rings and 
handles. 

All being ready, the gunner gives the command, 
Heave, and the carriage is run to the rear until the face 
of the piece is about one yard from the wall, when, dis- 
engaging the roller, he commands. Halt. All resume 
their posts. 

2. Load by detail — Load. , 

141. The gunner places himself at the breech ; breaks 
the rear with the right foot ; closes the vent with the 
second finger of the right hand ; and manages the elevat- 
ing screw with the left. 

No. 1 seizing the sponge-stafF at its middle, brings it 
across his body*; plants the left foot opposite to the muz- 
zle, close to the carriage, and breaks off with the right 
foot ; at the same time throwing the sponge staff into the 
left hand, back down, and extending both hands towards 
the ends of the staff, so as to enter the rammer-head into 
the embrasure and bring the sponge opposite to the 
muzzle. He then inserts it, and presses it to the bottom 
of the chamber with three motions. 

No. 2 goes for a cartridge, and returns to his post. 
If shells are used, he brings a shell at the same time. 

3. SpOliTGE. 

142. No. 1, using both hands, sponges the chamber 

11 



242 MANUAL FOK HEAYY AliTILLEEY. 

carefully ; withdraws the sponge, pressing it against the 
bottom of the bore ; turns it over, stepping to his left for 
this purpose, and rests the rammer-head against the right 
side of the face of the piece. 

No. 2 introduces the cartridge, bottom foremost, seams 
downward. No. 1 sets it home by three motions, with 
the right hand. 

4. Ram. 

143. No. 1, drawing out the rammer to the full ex- 
tent of his arm, rams once, and throws out the rammer, 
holding it as before, the rammer-head against the right 
side of the face of the piece. 

No. 2 introduces the canister or shell home with care ; 
throws out the rammer ; replaces it ; and resumes his 
post. 

The gunner, rising upon the left leg, pricks, leaving 
the priming-wire in the vent, and resumes his post. 

5. In Battery. 

144. All apply themselves to the carriage, as pre- 
scribed in No. 140, and ease the piece into battery. As 
soon as it touches the hurters, the gunner commands, 
Halt. All resume their posts. 

6. Point. 

145. No. 1 makes ready a tube, as prescribed for No. 
3, in No. 24. 

No. 2 goes to the rear of the chassis, and, facing to 
the front, applies himself to it by hand, in order to tra- 
verse it. 

The gunner withdraws the priming-wire, and, having 
pointed the piece, gives the word, Ready, making a signal 
with both hands, at which No. 2 resumes his post ; takes 
out the roller-handspike, and resumes his post. 

No. 1 steps to the vent and inserts the tube, holding 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY AKTILLEEY. 24:3 

the lanyard slightly stretched with the right hand, the 
cord passing between the fingers, back of the hand up, 
and breaks to his rear a full pace with the left foot, the 
left hand against the thigh. 

7. Number one (or the like) — Fire. 

146. No. 1 fires as prescribed for No. 3, in No. 25. 
What is prescribed in No. 26 will apply to this piece, 

substituting No. 1 for No. 3. 

147. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes 
the series of commands, begimiing with From Battery. 

To change posts. 

To load for action. 

To cease firing. 

To secure piece ^ and replace implements. 

To leave the battery. 

Executed as in Nos. Ill, 112, 113, 114, and 115. 



CHARGES, ETC. 

148. 

Charge of powd'er 2 lbs. 

Range at an angle of C, charge 2 lbs., shell 295 yards. 

Range at an angle of 1°, charge 2 lbs., shell 516 " 

Range at an angle of 5°, charge 2 lbs., shell 1,322 '* 

Range at an angle of 2°, charge If lbs., spherical-case, 

time 2" 600 " 

Range at an angle of 5° 80', charge If lbs., spher.-case, 

time 4" 1,050 " 

Range at an angle of 3° 30', charge 2 lbs., spher.-case, 

time 3" 880 " 

Proof range of powder 300 " 

Weight of the 24-pdr. shell 17 lbs. 

Weight of the round of canister 21 " 

No. of bullets in a round of canister..,. 48 " 



244 



MANUAL FOK IlEA^'Y ARTILLERY. 



Truck-hand- 
spikes, 



^ 



LESSON XV. 

Sermce of an S-inch Coltimhiad, mounted on a Colurribiad 
Carriage. 

Five men are necessary : one gunner and four other 
cannoneers. 

149. The piece is in battery. 

The implements, etc., are arranged as follows : 

Two on each side of the carriage, laid 
on the rails, one in rear of each front 
truck- wheel, and one in rear of each 
rear truck-wheel. _y 

One on each side of the carriage, laid 
on the ground in a line with the can- 
noneers, opposite to the traverse 
wheels, the small ends towards the 
parapet. 

J Laid across the ties at the junction of 

( the braces, handle to the left. 

^One yard behind the cannoneers of 
the right, the sponge uppermost, the 
sponge and rammer-heads turned 
from the parapet, inclined slightly 
from the piece, and supported upon 
a prop. 

j Suspended from the knob of the cas- 

( cable. 



Manceuvring- 
handspikes, 

Elevating-bar, 
Sponge-rammer, < 
Haversack, 



TuBE-POUCH, . < 



Containing friction tubes, and the lan- 
yard, wound in St. Andrew's cross 
upon its handle. Suspended from 
the knob of the cascable. 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY AKTILLEEY. 24:5 



Gunner's-pouch, ^ 



Containing the gunner's level, breech- 
sight, finger-stall, priming-wire, gun- 
ner's gimlet, vent-punch, chalk-line, 
and chalk. Suspended from the 
knob of the cascable. 
p j One on each side of the piece, laid on 

* * * * I the front of the rails. 
Vent-cover, . Covering the vent. 
ToMPiON, . . In the muzzle. 

T> j Leaning against the parapet, to the left 

( of the piece. 

{Containing cartridges, at the safest and 
most convenient place in rear of the 
piece. 
When several columbiads are served together, there 
will be only one gunner's level and two vent-punches to 
each battery, not exceeding six pieces. To the same bat- 
tery there will be one worm and one wrench. 

The shells are at the magazine, or other safe position, 
and are brought, as required, to the place prescribed for 
the budge-barrel. 

150. The cannoneers having been marched to their 
posts, the instructor explains to them the names and uses 
of the implements, and the nomenclatures of the colum- 
biad, its carriage, and the battery. 

151. To cause the implements to be distributed, the 
instructor commands : 

Take Implements, 

The gunner steps to the knob of the cascable ; takes 
off the vent-cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the 
parapet, in rear of his post ; gives the tube-pouch to No. 
3, and the haversack to No. 4 ; equips himself with his 
own pouch and the finger-stall, wearing the latter on the 



24:6 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 

second finger of the left hand ; takes the elevatmg-bar, 
and stepping between the rails, levels the piece conven- 
iently for loading ; applies his level to verify the line of 
sight which is marked on the piece, marking it, if neces- 
sary, with the chalk line, assisted by No. 2 ; and resumes 
his post, holding the elevating-bar with the right hand. 

No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch. 

No. 4 equips himself with the haversack, which he 
wears from the right shoulder to the left side. 

Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 take the truck-handspikes wdth the 
hand furthest from the parapet, and carry them to that 
side, holding them vertically, the arm extended naturally. 

152. The instructor causes the service of the piece to 
be executed by the following commands : 

1. From Battery. 

The gunner moves two paces to the right of his post. 

Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, facing from the parapet, place the 
wrenches on the ends of the axle-trees, the handspikes 
elevated about 30° to the rear, and at the word Heave 
by the gunner, bear down and throw the wheels into gear ; 
Nos. 3 and 4 immediately after laying their handspikes 
on the platform in front of their posts. 

Nos. 1 and 2, facing from the parapet, embar in the 
most convenient front mortises of the truck- wheels, the 
hand furthest from the carriage at the top of the handspike, 
the other hand eight inches low^er. 

Nos. 3 and 4 go to the assistance of Nos. 1 and 2, and, 
facing towards them, seize the handspikes with both hands 
between those of Nos. 1 and 2. 

Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, in applying themselves to the car- 
riage, to run it from or to battery, break to the rear with 
the foot nearest to the carriage. 

All being ready, the gunner gives the command, 
Heave. 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 247 

Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 act together, and bear upon the 
handspikes until they are nearly down to the rails, when 
the gunner commands, Unbar. Nos. 1 and 2 let go the 
handspikes with the hand nearest to the carriage, and 
chock the wheels. Nos. 3 and 4 withdraw the handspikes 
and pass them to Nos. 1 and 2, who re-insert them in the 
front mortises. 

The gunner again gives the command. Heave, and so 
on, until the face of the piece is about one yard from the 
parapet, when he commands. Halt. Nos. 3 and 4 take 
their posts. Nos. 1 and 2 chock the wheels as before, 
unbar, and place the wrench of their handspikes on the 
ends of the axle-tree of the front wheels. At the com- 
mand Out of Gear by the gunner, they throw the wheels 
out of gear ; lay their handspikes on the rails between 
the wheels ; and take their posts. 

2. Load by detail — Load. 

153. Executed as in Nos. 102 and 103. The gunner, 
if necessary, adjusts the piece conveniently for loading be- 
fore closing the vent. No. 4 brings up a shell, together 
with the cartridge. 

3. Sponge. 

154. Executed as in No, 104. 

4. Eam. 

155. Executed as in No. 105, except that the shell is 
set carefully home without being rammed. 

5. In Battery. 

156. Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the wheels, and place the 
chocks on the ties. 

Nos. 1,2, 3, and 4, facing towards the parapet, apply 
the wrenches of their handspikes to the ends of the axle- 
trees ; Nos. 1 and 2 so as to throw the front wheels into 



248 MANUAL FOK HEAVY ARTILLERY. 

gear, and Nos. 3 and 4 so as to throw the rear wheels out 
of gear. 

The gunner commands, Heave, when the front wheels 
are thrown into gear. 

Should the carriage run too easily after it is in mo- 
tion, the gunner will command. Rear Wheels out of 
Gear, when the rear wheels are thrown out of gear. Nos. 
3 and 4 each take a chock and hold it in front of the rear 
wheels, ready to apply it under them if necessary. 

When the head of the cheeks is about one foot from 
the end of the rails, the gunner commands. Chock, w^hen 
Nos. 3 and 4 chock the rear wheels. The wheels are un- 
checked, and the piece is run gently into battery, by Nos. 
3 and 4 throwing the rear wheels alternately out of and 
into gear. As soon as the head of the carriage touches 
the hurters, the gunner commands, Out of Gear, when 
the front w^heels are thrown out of gear ; also the rear 
wheels, should they be in gear. Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 take 
their posts, and lay their handspikes on the platform just 
in front of them. 

6. Point. 

157. No. 3 passes the hook of the lanyard through 
the eye of a tube from front to rear ; holds the handle of 
the lanyard with the right hand, the hook between the 
thumb and forefinger ; and stands ready to hand it to the 
gunner. 

Nos. 1 and 2, passing outside of the other cannoneers, 
move to the rear of the chassis, and, each taking one of 
the manoeuvring handspikes, embar with the levelled end 
under the traverse wheels. For traversing large angles, 
Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 apply themselves by hand at the end 
of the chassis. 

The gunner withdraws the priming-wire ; inserts the 
pawl of the elevating machine in the proper notch by 



MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 249 

means of the elevating bar, and with the breech-sight 
gives the required elevation ; No. 4 turning the handle of 
the screw according to his direction. 

The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises on 
the left leg, and gives the word Ready, making a signal 
wdth both hands, at which Nos. 1 and 2 unbar, lay down 
the handspikes, and resume their post ; receives the tube 
from No. 3, which he inserts in the vent ; dismounts from 
the chassis ; and goes to the windward to observe the 
effect of the shot. 

No. 3 stretches the lanyard as in No. 107. 

7. Number one (or the like) — Fire. 

158. Executed as in No. 108. 

What is prescribed in No. 109 will apply to this piece. 

159. Remark, — If the piece is to be fired at high an- 
gles, it is elevated in the following manner : 

Nos. 1 and 2 — the former carrying his traversing- 
handspike with him — move to the mule ; place the hand- 
spike in the bore ; pass the bight of a trace-rope over it ; 
and bear down slightly on the handspike to enable the 
gunner to free the pawl from the notch. The gunner 
draws the pawl back by its handle, and commands Ease 
Away. Nos. 1 and 2, holding the ends of the rope, ease 
dow^n the breech steadily, until the gunner commands, 
Steady, when he inserts the pawl in the proper notch. 

160. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes 
the series of commands, beginning with From Battery : 

To change posts. 
To load for action. 
To cease firing. 

To secure piece, and replace implements. 
To leave the battery. 
Executed as in Nos. Ill, 112, 113, 114, and 115. 
11^ 



CHAPTER XIII. 

AMMUNITION. 

Troops in the field should not only be supplied with 
a sufficient quantity of ammunition, but the men of the 
command should be taught how to prepare it. Cart- 
ridges for small-arms are made of paper, in the follow- 
ing manner : Having prepared the paper, which should 
be strong, but not too thick, by cutting it first into strips 
eight and a half inches wide, then cutting these strips 
crosswise into smaller strips four and a half inches in 
width, and then cutting these last diagonally, so that the 
pieces will be three inches on one side and five and a half 
on the other ; the pieces are then rolled on a small cylin- 
drical stick of the same diameter as the ball to be used, 
about six inches long, having a spherical cavity at one 
end and rounded at the other. The paper is laid on a 
table with the side perpendicular to the bases next the 
workman, the broad end to the left ; the stick laid on 
it with the concave end half an inch from the broad edge 
of the paper, and enveloped in it once. The right hand is 
then laid flat on the stick, and all the paper rolled on it. 
The projecting end of the paper is now neatly folded down 
into the concavity of the stick, pasted, and pressed on a 
ball imbedded in the table for the purpose. 



AMMUNITION. 251 

Instead of being pasted, these cylinders may be closed 
by choking with a string, tied to the table, and having at 
the other end a stick by which to hold it. The convex 
end of the former is placed to the left, and after the paper 
is rolled on, the former is taken in the left hand, and a 
turn made around it with the choking string half an inch 
from the end of the paper. Whilst the string is drawn 
tight with the right hand, the former is held in the left 
with the forefinger resting on the end of the cylinder, fold- 
ing it neatly down upon the end of the former. The 
choke is then firmly tied with twine. 

For ball cartridges, make the cylinders and choke 
them as above described, and the choke tied without cut- 
ting the twine. The former is then withdrawn, the ball 
put in, and the concave end of the former put in after it. 
The half hitches are made a little above the ball, and the 
twine cut off. 

For ball and buckshot cartridges, make the cylinder 
as before, insert three buckshot, fasten them with a half 
hitch, and insert and secure the ball as before. 

For buckshot cartridges, make the cylinder as before, 
insert four tiers of three buckshot each, as at first, making 
a half hitch between the tiers, and ending with a double 
hitch. 

To fill the cartridges, the cylinders are placed upright 
in a box, and the charge poured into each from a conical 
charger of the appropriate size ; the mouths of the cylin- 
ders are now folded down on the powder by two rectan- 
gular folds, and the cartridges bundled in packages often. 
For this a folding box is necessary ; it is made with two 
vertical sides at a distance from each other equal to five 
diameters of the ball, and two diameters high. 

The manner of preparing ammunition for artillery is 
found in the Manual of Artillery in preceding chapter. 



252 



AlVIMUNITION. 



TABLE. 

DIMENSIONS OF CARTRIDGE-BAGS. 



Q 

o 
»— I 

CQ 

1^ 





.^ 
















00 
























05 














i 


•ui-8 


.9 


^ 






lO 


Cs 


fO 


00 






<!l 












1— 1 










i 


O 

Q 










































» 












CO 














ii 






lO 




CO 






ro 






? 


02 


•ni-OX 


d 


i^^ 






00* 


^ 


jO 


c4 
















l-H 










o 
























W 
























•egaiS -ai-s 


^c 






(?4 


T^ 


o 


en 


Tin 














CO 






















CS 




\o 








3 


•qoai-8 


.9 


«D 






o 


(?q 


I 


d 














£M 


r-H 








3 






















H 






















p 










CO 












K? 






iO 




?o 












o 


•qoui-ot 


^fl 


x> 










1 


00 

1—1 






•jpd-2X 


a 


oq 
^ 




c^ 


i-H 






CO 












VO 














•ipd-8i: 


a 








ir^ 


j^^ 


;! 






GD 






























vo 












S5 


•ipd-tg 


.9 


VO 






oo 
1— i 


oi 


1 


CO* 












CD 














upd-28 


d 






I— 1 


00 


d 

T-H 


1 


00* 












00 














upd-3t 


d 


o 




Oi 


00 

1— 1 


1—1 

T— t 


1 


d 

r-H 












«f-i 




. 






, 












o 


o 


-tj 


'd 




• 












TJ 




3 


^ 

^ 




^ 










<D 


a 






•^ 




t3 












S3 

o 




Cm 


n3 




O 

P4 










s 


o 


c8 


o 


1 




^ 










o 


G 


^ 


^ 




O) 










'S 


Cm 

o 


•^ 
^ 


to 

a 


Cm 














s 




'S 


rM 


O 




rO 










^ 


rd 


^ 


© 


pd 




o 










o 


-f 


o 




-tJ 




I—I 










i 


bO 


P4 


'o 


bC 




c« 










a 




^ 


a 




!^ 










s 


h5 




^ 






tS 



5ta 



•5? 

1=1 



CQ 



bO 

^3 







rJ^LJP 



KJ^ I 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 

021 183 132 7 



::fc 






if 


\ 


r^^ 
i^i 





D 



yo 



^40 



»^ 



> Ir 









r^:-i 



:-5§^i__ 



^^■>> 



:^:> 




3^ 










^MmmJ^ 






